| submitted | available | document details (if available) | source link |
|---|---|---|---|
| May 31 2016 | May 31 2016 | Nassim Microsoft® Office Word 2007 |
| various | User Manual | Users Manual | 4.66 MiB | May 31 2016 |
Grandstream Networks, Inc. UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Table of Content GNU GPL INFORMATION ........................................................................ 17 CHANGE LOG ......................................................................................... 18 FIRMWARE VERSION 1.0.0.1 ............................................................................................................ 18 WELCOME ............................................................................................... 19 PRODUCT OVERVIEW ............................................................................ 21 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................................... 21 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................ 25 EQUIPMENT PACKAGING ................................................................................................................. 25 CONNECT YOUR UCM6200 .............................................................................................................. 25 CONNECT THE UCM6202 ........................................................................................................... 25 CONNECT THE UCM6204 ........................................................................................................... 26 CONNECT THE UCM6208 ........................................................................................................... 27 SAFETY COMPLIANCES ................................................................................................................... 28 WARRANTY ........................................................................................................................................ 28 GETTING STARTED ................................................................................ 31 USE THE LCD MENU ......................................................................................................................... 31 USE THE LED INDICATORS .............................................................................................................. 33 USE THE WEB GUI ............................................................................................................................ 34 ACCESS WEB GUI ...................................................................................................................... 34 SETUP WIZARD ........................................................................................................................... 36 WEB GUI CONFIGURATIONS ..................................................................................................... 37 WEB GUI LANGUAGES ............................................................................................................... 37 SAVE AND APPLY CHANGES ..................................................................................................... 38 MAKE YOUR FIRST CALL .................................................................................................................. 38 SYSTEM SETTINGS ................................................................................ 39 USER MANAGEMENT ........................................................................................................................ 39 USER PRIVILEGES ..................................................................................................................... 39 CREATE NEW WEB UI USER ..................................................................................................... 40 USER PORTAL ............................................................................................................................. 42 CONCURRENT MULTI-USER LOGIN ......................................................................................... 43 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 1 of 321 OPERATION LOG ........................................................................................................................ 43 CHANGE PASSWORD ....................................................................................................................... 45 CHANGE BINDNG EMAIL ........................................................................................................... 46 NETWORK SETTINGS ....................................................................................................................... 47 BASIC SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................ 47 802.1X .......................................................................................................................................... 52 STATIC ROUTES.......................................................................................................................... 53 PORT FORWORDING.................................................................................................................. 56 DDNS SETTINGS ......................................................................................................................... 58 FIREWALL ........................................................................................................................................... 60 STATIC DEFENSE ....................................................................................................................... 60 DYNAMIC DEFENSE ................................................................................................................... 63 FAIL2BAN ..................................................................................................................................... 64 LDAP SERVER .................................................................................................................................... 65 LDAP SERVER CONFIGURATIONS ........................................................................................... 66 LDAP PHONEBOOK .................................................................................................................... 67 LDAP CLIENT CONFIGURATIONS ............................................................................................. 70 HTTP SERVER .................................................................................................................................... 72 EMAIL SETTINGS ............................................................................................................................... 73 TIME SETTINGS ................................................................................................................................. 74 AUTO TIME UPDATING ............................................................................................................... 74 SET TIME MANUALLY ................................................................................................................. 76 OFFICE TIME ............................................................................................................................... 76 HOLIDAY ...................................................................................................................................... 78 NTP SERVER ...................................................................................................................................... 80 RECORDINGS STORAGE .................................................................................................................. 80 LOGIN TIMEOUT SETTINGS ............................................................................................................. 82 GOOGLE SERVICE SETTINGS SUPPORT ....................................................................................... 83 PROVISIONING ....................................................................................... 87 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................................................... 87 CONFIGURATION ARCHITECTURE FOR END POINT DEVICE ...................................................... 87 AUTO PROVISIONING SETTINGS .................................................................................................... 88 DISCOVERY ........................................................................................................................................ 91 GLOBAL CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................... 92 GLOBAL POLICY ......................................................................................................................... 92 GLOBAL TEMPLATES ............................................................................................................... 100 MODEL CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................... 102 MODEL TEMPLATES ................................................................................................................. 102 MODEL UPDATE ........................................................................................................................ 104 DEVICE CONFIGURATION .............................................................................................................. 105 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 2 of 321 CREATE NEW DEVICE .............................................................................................................. 105 MANAGE DEVICES ................................................................................................................... 106 SAMPLE APPLICATION .................................................................................................................... 113 EXTENSIONS ......................................................................................... 119 CREATE NEW USER ........................................................................................................................ 119 CREATE NEW SIP EXTENSION ............................................................................................... 119 CREATE NEW IAX EXTENSION ............................................................................................... 125 CREATE NEW FXS EXTENSION .............................................................................................. 129 BATCH ADD EXTENSIONS .............................................................................................................. 134 BATCH ADD SIP EXTENSIONS ................................................................................................ 134 BATCH ADD IAX EXTENSIONS ................................................................................................ 137 SEARCH AND EDIT EXTENSION .................................................................................................... 139 EXPORT EXTENSIONS .................................................................................................................... 141 IMPORT EXTENSIONS..................................................................................................................... 141 EMAIL TO USER ............................................................................................................................... 142 MULTIPLE REGISTRATIONS PER EXTENSION ............................................................................. 144 SMS MESSAGE SUPPORT .............................................................................................................. 145 TRUNKS ................................................................................................. 147 ANALOG TRUNKS ............................................................................................................................ 147 ANALOG TRUNK CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................ 147 PSTN DETECTION .................................................................................................................... 150 VOIP TRUNKS .................................................................................................................................. 153 DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING (DOD) ........................................................................................ 164 SLA STATION ........................................................................................ 167 CREATE/EDIT SLA STATION ........................................................................................................... 167 SAMPLE CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................. 168 CALL ROUTES ...................................................................................... 171 OUTBOUND ROUTES ...................................................................................................................... 171 INBOUND ROUTES .......................................................................................................................... 173 INBOUND RULE CONFIGURATIONS ....................................................................................... 174 INBOUND ROUTE: PREPEND EXAMPLE ................................................................................ 175 INBOUND ROUTE: MULTIPLE MODE ...................................................................................... 176 FAX INTELLIGENT ROUTE ....................................................................................................... 177 FAX WITH TWO MEDIA ............................................................................................................. 178 BLACKLIST CONFIGURATIONS ............................................................................................... 178 CONFERENCE BRIDGE ........................................................................ 181 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 3 of 321 CONFERENCE BRIDGE CONFIGURATIONS .......................................................................... 181 JOIN A CONFERENCE CALL .................................................................................................... 183 INVITE OTHER PARTIES TO JOIN CONFERENCE ................................................................. 183 DURING THE CONFERENCE ................................................................................................... 184 RECORD CONFERENCE .......................................................................................................... 185 CONFERENCE SCHEDULE .................................................................. 187 CONFERENCE SCHEUDLE CONFIGURATION .............................................................................. 187 IVR ......................................................................................................... 191 CONFIGURE IVR .............................................................................................................................. 191 CREATE CUSTOM PROMPT ........................................................................................................... 193 RECORD NEW CUSTOM PROMPT .......................................................................................... 193 UPLOAD CUSTOM PROMPT .................................................................................................... 194 LANGUAGE SETTINGS FOR VOICE PROMPT .................................... 195 DOWNLOAD AND INSTALL VOICE PROMPT PACKAGE ............................................................... 195 CUSTOMIZE SPECIFIC PROMPT ................................................................................................... 197 VOICEMAIL ............................................................................................ 199 CONFIGURE VOICEMAIL ................................................................................................................ 199 ACCESS VOICEMAIL ....................................................................................................................... 200 VOICEMAIL EMAIL SETTINGS ........................................................................................................ 201 CONFIGURE VOICEMAIL GROUP .................................................................................................. 202 RING GROUP ......................................................................................... 205 CONFIGURE RING GROUP ............................................................................................................. 205 REMOTE EXTENSION IN RING GROUP ........................................................................................ 207 PAGING AND INTERCOM GROUP ....................................................... 211 CONFIGURE PAGING/INTERCOM GROUP .................................................................................... 211 CALL QUEUE ........................................................................................ 213 CONFIGURE CALL QUEUE ............................................................................................................. 213 EXTENSION GROUPS ........................................................................... 217 CONFIGURE EXTENSION GROUPS .............................................................................................. 217 USING EXTENSION GROUPS ......................................................................................................... 218 PICKUP GROUPS .................................................................................. 219 CONFIGURE PICKUP GROUPS ...................................................................................................... 219 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 4 of 321 CONFIGURE PICKUP FEATURE CODE.......................................................................................... 219 MUSIC ON HOLD ................................................................................... 221 FAX/T.38 ................................................................................................. 223 CONFIGURE FAX/T.38 ..................................................................................................................... 223 SAMPLE CONFIGURATION TO RECEIVE FAX FROM PSTN LINE ............................................... 224 SAMPLE CONFIGURATION FOR FAX-TO-EMAIL .......................................................................... 227 ASTERISK MANAGER INTERFACE (RESTRICTED ACCESS) ............ 229 BUSY CAMP-ON .................................................................................... 231 FOLLOW ME .......................................................................................... 233 ONE-KEY DIAL ...................................................................................... 237 DISA ....................................................................................................... 239 CALLBACK FEATURE .......................................................................... 241 BLF AND EVENT LIST ........................................................................... 243 BLF .................................................................................................................................................... 243 EVENT LIST ...................................................................................................................................... 243 DIAL BY NAME ...................................................................................... 247 DIAL BY NAME CONFIGURATION................................................................................................... 247 ACTIVE CALLS AND MONITOR ........................................................... 251 ACTIVE CALLS STATUS .................................................................................................................. 251 HANG UP ACTIVE CALLS ................................................................................................................ 252 CALL MONITOR ................................................................................................................................ 252 CALL FEATURES .................................................................................. 255 FEATURE CODES ............................................................................................................................ 255 CALL RECORDING ........................................................................................................................... 259 CALL PARK ....................................................................................................................................... 260 PARK A CALL ............................................................................................................................. 260 RETRIEVE THE PARKED CALL ................................................................................................ 260 ENABLE SPY .................................................................................................................................... 260 INTERNAL OPTIONS ............................................................................. 263 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 5 of 321 INTERNAL OPTIONS/GENERAL ..................................................................................................... 263 INTERNAL OPTIONS/JITTER BUFFER ........................................................................................... 265 INTERNAL OPTIONS/RTP SETTINGS ............................................................................................ 266 INTERNAL OPTIONS/PAYLOAD ...................................................................................................... 266 IAX SETTINGS ....................................................................................... 269 IAX SETTINGS/GENERAL................................................................................................................ 269 IAX SETTINGS/REGISTRATION ...................................................................................................... 269 IAX SETTINGS/STATIC DEFENSE .................................................................................................. 270 SIP SETTINGS ....................................................................................... 271 SIP SETTINGS/GENERAL ................................................................................................................ 271 SIP SETTINGS/MISC ........................................................................................................................ 271 SIP SETTINGS/SESSION TIMER ..................................................................................................... 272 SIP SETTINGS/TCP AND TLS .......................................................................................................... 272 SIP SETTINGS/NAT .......................................................................................................................... 273 SIP SETTINGS/TOS.......................................................................................................................... 274 PORTS CONFIG .................................................................................... 277 VALUE-ADDED FEATURES .................................................................. 279 FAX SENDING .................................................................................................................................. 279 ANNOUNCEMENTS CENTER ......................................................................................................... 279 ANNOUNCEMENTS CENTER SETTINGS ............................................................................... 280 GROUP SETTINGS .................................................................................................................... 280 STATUS AND REPORTING ................................................................... 283 PBX STATUS ..................................................................................................................................... 283 TRUNKS ..................................................................................................................................... 283 EXTENSIONS ............................................................................................................................. 284 QUEUES ..................................................................................................................................... 285 CONFERENCE ROOMS ............................................................................................................ 286 INTERFACES STATUS............................................................................................................... 287 PARKING LOT ............................................................................................................................ 288 SYSTEM STATUS ............................................................................................................................. 289 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 289 NETWORK ................................................................................................................................. 290 STORAGE USAGE ..................................................................................................................... 290 RESOURCE USAGE .................................................................................................................. 291 SYSTEM EVENTS ............................................................................................................................ 292 ALERT EVENTS LIST ................................................................................................................ 292 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 6 of 321 ALERT LOG ................................................................................................................................ 294 ALERT CONTACT ...................................................................................................................... 295 CDR ................................................................................................................................................... 295 CDR IMPROVEMENT ................................................................................................................ 298 DOWNLOADED CDR FILE ........................................................................................................ 299 STATISTICS ................................................................................................................................ 301 RECORDING FILES ................................................................................................................... 301 API CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................... 302 UPGRADING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................... 305 UPGRADING ..................................................................................................................................... 305 UPGRADING VIA NETWORK .................................................................................................... 305 UPGRADING VIA LOCAL UPLOAD ........................................................................................... 306 NO LOCAL FIRMWARE SERVERS ........................................................................................... 308 BACKUP ............................................................................................................................................ 308 BACKUP/RESTORE ................................................................................................................... 308 DATA SYNC ................................................................................................................................ 311 RESTORE CONFIGURATION FROM BACKUP FILE ............................................................... 312 CLEANER .......................................................................................................................................... 313 RESET AND REBOOT ...................................................................................................................... 314 SYSLOG ............................................................................................................................................ 315 TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................................................................... 315 ETHERNET CAPTURE .............................................................................................................. 315 IP PING ....................................................................................................................................... 316 TRACEROUTE ........................................................................................................................... 317 ANALOG RECORD TRACE ....................................................................................................... 317 SERVICE CHECK ...................................................................................................................... 318 NETWORK STATUS ................................................................................................................... 318 REMOTE ACCESS ............................................................................................................................ 319 SSH ACCESS ............................................................................................................................. 319 EXPERIENCING THE UCM6200 SERIES IP PBX ................................. 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 7 of 321 Table of Tables UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Table 1: Technical Specifications................................................................................................................. 21 Table 2: UCM6202/UCM6204 Equipment Packaging ................................................................................. 25 Table 3: LCD Menu Options ........................................................................................................................ 32 Table 4: UCM6202/UCM6204 LED INDICATORS ...................................................................................... 33 Table 5: UCM6208 LED INDICATORS ....................................................................................................... 34 Table 6: User Management->Create New User .......................................................................................... 41 Table 7: Operation Log Column Header ..................................................................................................... 44 Table 8: Change Binding Email option ........................................................................................................ 47 Table 9: UCM6202/UCM6204 Network Settings->Basic Settings .............................................................. 47 Table 10: UCM6208 Network Settings->Basic Settings .............................................................................. 49 Table 11: UCM6200 Network Settings->802.1X ......................................................................................... 53 Table 12: UCM6200 Network Settings->Static Routes ............................................................................... 54 Table 13: UCM6202/UCM6204 Network Settings->Port Forwarding .......................................................... 56 Table 14: UCM6200 Firewall->Static Defense->Current Service ................................................................ 61 Table 15: Typical Firewall Settings .............................................................................................................. 61 Table 16: Firewall Rule Settings .................................................................................................................. 62 Table 17: UCM6200 Firewall Dynamic Defense ......................................................................................... 63 Table 18: Fail2Ban Settings ........................................................................................................................ 64 Table 19: HTTP Server Settings .................................................................................................................. 73 Table 20: Email Settings .............................................................................................................................. 73 Table 21: Time Auto Updating ..................................................................................................................... 75 Table 22: Create New Office Time .............................................................................................................. 77 Table 23: Create New Holiday..................................................................................................................... 79 Table 24: Auto Provision Settings ............................................................................................................... 90 Table 25: Global Policy Parameters->Localization ..................................................................................... 93 Table 26: Global Policy Parameters->Phone Settings ................................................................................ 94 Table 27: Global Policy Parameters->Contact List ..................................................................................... 95 Table 28: Global Policy Parameters->Maintenance .................................................................................... 97 Table 29: Global Policy Parameters->Network Settings ............................................................................. 98 Table 30: Global Policy Parameters->Customization.................................................................................. 99 Table 31: Create New Template ................................................................................................................ 100 Table 32: Create New Model Template ..................................................................................................... 102 Table 33: SIP Extension Configuration Parameters->Basic Settings ....................................................... 120 Table 34: SIP Extension Configuration Parameters->Media..................................................................... 121 Table 35: SIP Extension Configuration Parameters->Features ................................................................ 122 Table 36: SIP Extension Configuration Parameters->Specific Time ......................................................... 125 Table 37: IAX Extension Configuration Parameters->Basic Settings ....................................................... 125 Table 38: IAX Extension Configuration Parameters->Media .................................................................... 126 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 8 of 321 Table 39: IAX Extension Configuration Parameters->Features ................................................................ 127 Table 40: IAX Extension Configuration Parameters->Specific Time ......................................................... 129 Table 41: FXS Extension Configuration Parameters->Basic Settings ...................................................... 130 Table 42: FXS Extension Configuration Parameters->Media ................................................................... 131 Table 43: FXS Extension Configuration Parameters->Features ............................................................... 132 Table 44: FXS Extension Configuration Parameters->Specific Time ........................................................ 134 Table 45: Batch Add SIP Extension Parameters ....................................................................................... 135 Table 46: Batch Add IAX Extension Parameters ....................................................................................... 137 Table 47: Analog Trunk Configuration Parameters ................................................................................... 147 Table 48: PSTN Detection for Analog Trunk ............................................................................................. 152 Table 49: Create New SIP Trunk ............................................................................................................... 154 Table 50: SIP Register Trunk Configuration Parameters .......................................................................... 155 Table 51: SIP Peer Trunk Configuration Parameters ................................................................................ 158 Table 52: Create New IAX Trunk ............................................................................................................... 161 Table 53: IAX Register Trunk Configuration Parameters .......................................................................... 161 Table 54: IAX Peer Trunk Configuration Parameters ................................................................................ 162 Table 55: SLA Station Configuration Parameters ...................................................................................... 167 Table 56: Outbound Route Configuration Parameters .............................................................................. 171 Table 57: Inbound Rule Configuration Parameters ................................................................................... 174 Table 58: Conference Bridge Configuration Parameters .......................................................................... 181 Table 59: Conference Caller IVR Menu .................................................................................................... 185 Table 60: Conference Schedule Parameters ............................................................................................ 187 Table 61: IVR Configuration Parameters .................................................................................................. 191 Table 62: Voicemail Settings ..................................................................................................................... 199 Table 63: Voicemail IVR Menu .................................................................................................................. 200 Table 64: Voicemail Email Settings ........................................................................................................... 201 Table 65: Voicemail Group Settings .......................................................................................................... 203 Table 66: Ring Group Parameters ............................................................................................................ 205 Table 67: Paging/Intercom Group Configuration Parameters ................................................................... 211 Table 68: Call Queue Configuration Parameters ...................................................................................... 213 Table 69: FAX/T.38 Settings ...................................................................................................................... 223 Table 70: Follow Me Settings .................................................................................................................... 234 Table 71: Follow Me Options ..................................................................................................................... 235 Table 72: DISA Settings ............................................................................................................................ 239 Table 73: Callback Configuration Parameters........................................................................................... 241 Table 74: Event List Settings ..................................................................................................................... 243 Table 75: UCM6200 Feature Codes ......................................................................................................... 255 Table 76: Internal Options/General ........................................................................................................... 263 Table 77: Internal Options/Jitter Buffer ...................................................................................................... 265 Table 78: Internal Options/RTP Settings ................................................................................................... 266 Table 79: Internal Options/Payload ........................................................................................................... 266 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 9 of 321 Table 80: IAX Settings/General ................................................................................................................. 269 Table 81: IAX Settings/Registration .......................................................................................................... 269 Table 82: IAX Settings/Static Defense ...................................................................................................... 270 Table 83: SIP Settings/General ................................................................................................................. 271 Table 84: SIP Settings/Misc ...................................................................................................................... 271 Table 85: SIP Settings/Session Timer ....................................................................................................... 272 Table 86: SIP Settings/TCP and TLS ........................................................................................................ 272 Table 87: SIP Settings/NAT ....................................................................................................................... 273 Table 88: SIP Settings/ToS ........................................................................................................................ 274 Table 89: Internal Options/Ports Config .................................................................................................... 277 Table 90: Announcements Center Settings ............................................................................................... 280 Table 91: Group Settings ........................................................................................................................... 280 Table 92: Trunk Status ............................................................................................................................... 283 Table 93: Extension Status ........................................................................................................................ 285 Table 94: Agent Status .............................................................................................................................. 286 Table 95: Interface Status Indicators ......................................................................................................... 287 Table 96: Parking Lot Status ..................................................................................................................... 288 Table 97: System Status->General ........................................................................................................... 289 Table 98: System Status->Network ........................................................................................................... 290 Table 99: CDR Filter Criteria ..................................................................................................................... 296 Table 100: CDR Statistics Filter Criteria .................................................................................................... 301 Table 101: API Configuration Files ............................................................................................................ 302 Table 102: Network Upgrade Configuration .............................................................................................. 306 Table 103: Data Sync Configuration ......................................................................................................... 311 Table 104: Cleaner Configuration ............................................................................................................. 313 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 10 of 321 Table of Figures UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Figure 1: UCM6202 Front View ................................................................................................................... 25 Figure 2: UCM6202 Back View ................................................................................................................... 26 Figure 3: UCM6204 Front View ................................................................................................................... 26 Figure 4: UCM6204 Back View ................................................................................................................... 27 Figure 5: UCM6208 Front View ................................................................................................................... 28 Figure 6: UCM6208 Back View ................................................................................................................... 28 Figure 7: UCM6204 Web GUI Login Page .................................................................................................. 34 Figure 8: UCM6200 Setup Wizard .............................................................................................................. 36 Figure 9: UCM6200 Web GUI Language .................................................................................................... 37 Figure 10: User Management Page Display ............................................................................................... 39 Figure 11: Create New User ........................................................................................................................ 41 Figure 12: User Management New Users ................................................................................................ 41 Figure 13: Edit User Information by Super Admin....................................................................................... 42 Figure 14: User Portal Login ....................................................................................................................... 42 Figure 15: User Portal Layout ..................................................................................................................... 43 Figure 16: Multiple User Operation Error Prompt ....................................................................................... 43 Figure 17: Operation Logs .......................................................................................................................... 44 Figure 18: Operation Logs Filter ................................................................................................................. 45 Figure 19 : Change Password..................................................................................................................... 46 Figure 20: Change Binding Email ............................................................................................................... 46 Figure 21: UCM6200 Network Interface Method: Route ............................................................................. 50 Figure 22: UCM6200 Network Interface Method: Switch ............................................................................ 51 Figure 23: UCM6200 Network Interface Method: Dual ............................................................................... 52 Figure 24: UCM6200 Using 802.1X as Client ............................................................................................. 52 Figure 25: UCM6200 Using 802.1X EAP-MD5 ........................................................................................... 53 Figure 26: UCM6204 Static Route Sample ................................................................................................. 55 Figure 27: UCM6204 Static Route Configuration ........................................................................................ 55 Figure 28: UCM6202/UCM6204 Port Forwarding Configuration ................................................................ 57 Figure 29: GXP2160 Web Access Using UCM6202 Port Forwarding ........................................................ 58 Figure 30: Register Domain Name on noip.com ......................................................................................... 59 Figure 31: UCM6200 DDNS Setting ........................................................................................................... 59 Figure 32: Using Domain Name to Connect to UCM6200 .......................................................................... 60 Figure 33: Create New Firewall Rule .......................................................................................................... 62 Figure 34: Configure Dynamic Defense ...................................................................................................... 64 Figure 35: LDAP Server Configurations ...................................................................................................... 66 Figure 36: Default LDAP Phonebook DN .................................................................................................... 66 Figure 37: Default LDAP Phonebook Attributes .......................................................................................... 67 Figure 38: LDAP Server->LDAP Phonebook .............................................................................................. 67 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 11 of 321 Figure 39: Add LDAP Phonebook ............................................................................................................... 68 Figure 40: Edit LDAP Phonebook ............................................................................................................... 68 Figure 41: Import Phonebook...................................................................................................................... 69 Figure 42: Phonebook CSV File Format ..................................................................................................... 69 Figure 43: LDAP Phonebook After Import ................................................................................................... 70 Figure 44: Export Selected LDAP Phonebook ............................................................................................ 70 Figure 45: LDAP Client Configurations ....................................................................................................... 71 Figure 46: GXP2200 LDAP Phonebook Configuration ............................................................................... 72 Figure 47: UCM6200 Email Settings ........................................................................................................... 74 Figure 48: Set Time Manually ..................................................................................................................... 76 Figure 49: Create New Office Time ............................................................................................................. 77 Figure 50: Settings->Time Settings->Office Time ....................................................................................... 78 Figure 51: Create New Holiday ................................................................................................................... 78 Figure 52: Settings->Time Settings->Holiday ............................................................................................. 79 Figure 53: Settings->Recordings Storage ................................................................................................... 80 Figure 54: Recordings Storage Prompt Information ................................................................................... 81 Figure 55: Recording Storage Category ..................................................................................................... 81 Figure 56: Login Timeout Settings .............................................................................................................. 82 Figure 57: Google Service Settings->OAuth2.0 Authentication .................................................................. 83 Figure 58: Google Service->New Project ................................................................................................... 84 Figure 59: Google Service->Create New Credential .................................................................................. 84 Figure 60: Google Service->OAuth2.0 Login .............................................................................................. 85 Figure 61: Zero Config Configuration Architecture for End Point Device ................................................... 88 Figure 62: UCM6200 Zero Config ............................................................................................................... 89 Figure 63: Auto Provision Settings .............................................................................................................. 90 Figure 64: Auto Discover ............................................................................................................................. 92 Figure 65: Discovered Devices ................................................................................................................... 92 Figure 66: Global Policy Categories ........................................................................................................... 93 Figure 67: Edit Global Template ................................................................................................................ 101 Figure 68: Edit Model Template ................................................................................................................ 103 Figure 69: Template Management ............................................................................................................ 104 Figure 70: Upload Model Template Manually ............................................................................................ 105 Figure 71: Create New Device .................................................................................................................. 106 Figure 72: Manage Devices ...................................................................................................................... 106 Figure 73: Edit Device ............................................................................................................................... 107 Figure 74: Edit Customize Device Settings ............................................................................................... 109 Figure 75: Add P Value in Customize Device Settings ............................................................................. 110 Figure 76: Modify Selected Devices - Same Model .................................................................................. 111 Figure 77: Modify Selected Devices - Different Models ............................................................................ 112 Figure 78: Device List in Zero Config ........................................................................................................ 113 Figure 79: Zero Config Sample - Global Policy......................................................................................... 114 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 12 of 321 Figure 80: Zero Config Sample - Device Preview 1 .................................................................................. 115 Figure 81: Zero Config Sample - Device Preview 2 .................................................................................. 116 Figure 82: Zero Config Sample - Device Preview 3 .................................................................................. 117 Figure 83: Create New Device .................................................................................................................. 119 Figure 84: Manage Extensions ................................................................................................................. 140 Figure 85: Export Extensions .................................................................................................................... 141 Figure 86: Import Extensions .................................................................................................................... 141 Figure 87: Email To User - Prompt Information ......................................................................................... 142 Figure 88: Account Registration Information and QR Code ...................................................................... 143 Figure 89: LDAP Client Information and QR Code ................................................................................... 143 Figure 90: Multiple Registrations per Extension ....................................................................................... 144 Figure 91: Extension - Concurrent Registration ........................................................................................ 144 Figure 92: SMS Message Support ............................................................................................................ 145 Figure 93: UCM6200 FXO Tone Settings ................................................................................................. 150 Figure 94: UCM6200 PSTN Detection ...................................................................................................... 151 Figure 95: UCM6200 PSTN Detection: Auto Detect ................................................................................. 151 Figure 96: UCM6200 PSTN Detection: Semi-Auto Detect ....................................................................... 152 Figure 97: DOD extension selection ......................................................................................................... 164 Figure 98: Edit DOD .................................................................................................................................. 165 Figure 99: SLA Station .............................................................................................................................. 167 Figure 100: Enable SLA Mode for Analog Trunk ....................................................................................... 169 Figure 101: Analog Trunk with SLA Mode Enabled .................................................................................. 169 Figure 102: SLA Example - SLA Station ................................................................................................... 169 Figure 103: SLA Example - MPK Configuration ........................................................................................ 170 Figure 104: Inbound Route feature: Prepend ........................................................................................... 176 Figure 105: Inbound Route - Multiple Mode.............................................................................................. 177 Figure 106: Blacklist Configuration Parameters........................................................................................ 178 Figure 107: Blacklist csv File..................................................................................................................... 179 Figure 108: Conference Invitation From Web GUI .................................................................................... 183 Figure 109: Conference Recording ........................................................................................................... 186 Figure 110: Conference Schedule............................................................................................................. 190 Figure 111: Click on Prompt to Create IVR Prompt .................................................................................. 193 Figure 112: Record New Custom Prompt ................................................................................................. 194 Figure 113: Upload Custom Prompt .......................................................................................................... 194 Figure 114: Language Settings for Voice Prompt ..................................................................................... 195 Figure 115: Voice Prompt Package List .................................................................................................... 196 Figure 116: New Voice Prompt Language Added ..................................................................................... 196 Figure 117: Upload Single Voice Prompt for Entire Language Pack ........................................................ 197 Figure 118: Voicemail Email Settings ........................................................................................................ 202 Figure 119: Voicemail Group ..................................................................................................................... 203 Figure 120: Ring Group ............................................................................................................................. 205 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 13 of 321 Figure 121: Ring Group Configuration ...................................................................................................... 207 Figure 122: Sync LDAP Server option ...................................................................................................... 208 Figure 123: Manually Sync LDAP Server ................................................................................................. 208 Figure 124: Ring Group Remote Extension .............................................................................................. 209 Figure 125: Paging/Intercom Group .......................................................................................................... 211 Figure 126: Page/Intercom Group Settings .............................................................................................. 212 Figure 127: Call Queue ............................................................................................................................. 213 Figure 128: Agent Login Settings .............................................................................................................. 216 Figure 129: Edit Extension Group ............................................................................................................. 217 Figure 130: Select Extension Group in Outbound Route .......................................................................... 218 Figure 131: Edit Pickup Group .................................................................................................................. 219 Figure 132: Edit Pickup Feature Code ...................................................................................................... 220 Figure 133: Music On Hold Default Class ................................................................................................. 221 Figure 134: Configure Analog Trunk without Fax Detection ..................................................................... 225 Figure 135: Configure Extension for Fax Machine: FXS Extension ......................................................... 225 Figure 136: Configure Extension for Fax Machine: Analog Settings ........................................................ 226 Figure 137: Configure Inbound Rule for Fax ............................................................................................. 226 Figure 138: Create Fax Extension ............................................................................................................ 227 Figure 139: Inbound Route to Fax Extension ........................................................................................... 228 Figure 140: Create Follow Me ................................................................................................................... 233 Figure 141: Edit Follow Me ....................................................................................................................... 233 Figure 142: Configure One-Key Dial ......................................................................................................... 237 Figure 143: One-Key Dial Destinations ..................................................................................................... 238 Figure 144: Create New DISA................................................................................................................... 239 Figure 145: Create New Event List ........................................................................................................... 244 Figure 146: Create Dial By Name Group .................................................................................................. 247 Figure 147: Dial By Name Group In IVR Key Pressing Events ................................................................ 248 Figure 148: Dial By Name Group In Inbound Rule ................................................................................... 249 Figure 149: Configure Extension First Name and Last Name .................................................................. 250 Figure 150: Status->PBX Status->Active Calls - Ringing .......................................................................... 251 Figure 151: Status->PBX Status->Active Calls Call Established ........................................................... 251 Figure 152: Configure to Monitor an Active Call ....................................................................................... 252 Figure 153: Download Recording File from CDR Page ............................................................................ 259 Figure 154: Download Recording File from Recording Files Page ........................................................... 260 Figure 155: FXS Ports Signaling Preference ............................................................................................ 277 Figure 156: FXO Ports ACIM Settings ...................................................................................................... 277 Figure 157: Fax Sending in Web UI .......................................................................................................... 279 Figure 158: Announcements Center ......................................................................................................... 280 Figure 159: Announcements Center Group Configuration ........................................................................ 281 Figure 160: Announcements Center Code Configuration ......................................................................... 282 Figure 161: Announcements Center Example .......................................................................................... 282 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 14 of 321 Figure 162: Status->PBX Status ............................................................................................................... 283 Figure 163: Trunk Status ........................................................................................................................... 283 Figure 164: Extension Status .................................................................................................................... 284 Figure 165: Queue Status ......................................................................................................................... 286 Figure 166: Conference Room Status ....................................................................................................... 287 Figure 167: UCM6204 Interfaces Status ................................................................................................... 287 Figure 168: Parking Lot Status .................................................................................................................. 288 Figure 169: System Status->Storage Usage ............................................................................................. 291 Figure 170: System Status->Resource Usage .......................................................................................... 291 Figure 171: System Events->Alert Events Lists: Disk Usage ................................................................... 292 Figure 172: System Events->Alert Events Lists: Memory Usage ............................................................. 293 Figure 173: System Events->Alert Events Lists: System Reboot ............................................................. 293 Figure 174: System Events->Alert Events Lists: System Crash ............................................................... 293 Figure 175: System Events->Alert Log ..................................................................................................... 294 Figure 176: Filter for Alert Log .................................................................................................................. 295 Figure 177: CDR Filter .............................................................................................................................. 296 Figure 178: Call Report ............................................................................................................................. 297 Figure 179: Call Report Entry with Audio Recording File .......................................................................... 297 Figure 180: Automatic Download Settings ................................................................................................ 298 Figure 181: CDR Report ........................................................................................................................... 298 Figure 182: Detailed CDR Information ...................................................................................................... 299 Figure 183: Downloaded CDR File Sample - Call To Shows "s" .............................................................. 299 Figure 184: Downloaded CDR File Sample - Source Channel and Dest Channel 1 ................................ 300 Figure 185: Downloaded CDR File Sample - Source Channel and Dest Channel 2 ................................ 300 Figure 186: Downloaded CDR File Sample - Source Channel and Dest Channel 3 ................................ 300 Figure 187: CDR Statistics ........................................................................................................................ 301 Figure 188: CDR->Recording Files ........................................................................................................... 302 Figure 189: Network Upgrade ................................................................................................................... 305 Figure 190: Local Upgrade........................................................................................................................ 306 Figure 191: Upgrading Firmware Files ...................................................................................................... 307 Figure 192: Reboot UCM6200 .................................................................................................................. 307 Figure 193: Create New Backup ............................................................................................................... 309 Figure 194: Backup / Restore ................................................................................................................... 310 Figure 195: Local Backup ......................................................................................................................... 310 Figure 196: Data Sync .............................................................................................................................. 311 Figure 197: Restore UCM6200 from Backup File ..................................................................................... 312 Figure 198: Cleaner .................................................................................................................................. 313 Figure 199: Reset and Reboot .................................................................................................................. 314 Figure 200: Ethernet Capture.................................................................................................................... 316 Figure 201: PING ...................................................................................................................................... 316 Figure 202: Traceroute .............................................................................................................................. 317 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 15 of 321 Figure 203: Troubleshooting Analog Trunks ............................................................................................. 318 Figure 204: Service Check ........................................................................................................................ 318 Figure 205: Network Status ....................................................................................................................... 319 Figure 206: SSH Access ........................................................................................................................... 320 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 16 of 321 GNU GPL INFORMATION UCM6200 firmware contains third-party software licensed under the GNU General Public License (GPL). Grandstream uses software under the specific terms of the GPL. Please see the GNU General Public License (GPL) for the exact terms and conditions of the license. Grandstream GNU GPL related source code can be downloaded from Grandstream web site from:
http://www.grandstream.com/support/faq/gnu-general-public-license/gnu-gpl-information-download Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 17 of 321 CHANGE LOG This section documents significant changes from previous versions of the UCM6200 user manuals. Only major new features or major document updates are listed here. Minor updates for corrections or editing are not documented here. FIRMWARE VERSION 1.0.0.1 This is the initial version. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 18 of 321 WELCOME Thank you for purchasing Grandstream UCM6200 series IP PBX appliance. The UCM6200 series IP PBX appliance is designed to bring enterprise-grade voice, video, data, and mobility features to small-to-medium businesses (SMBs) in an easy-to-manage fashion. This IP PBX series allows businesses to unify multiple communication technologies, such comprehensive voice, video calling, video conferencing, video surveillance, data tools and facility access management onto one common network that that can be managed and/or accessed remotely. The UCM6200 series supports a dual core 1GHz ARM CortexTM A9 and 400Mhz VINETICTM A8 processors, 1GB RAM and 4GB flash. The secure and reliable UCM6200 series delivers enterprise-grade features without any licensing fees, costs-per-feature or recurring fees.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------
Caution:
Changes or modifications to this product not expressly approved by Grandstream, or operation of this product in any way other than as detailed by this User Manual, could void your manufacturer warranty. Warning:
Please do not use a different power adaptor with the UCM6200 as it may cause damage to the products and void the manufacturer warranty.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ --------------------------------
This document is subject to change without notice. The latest electronic version of this user manual is available for download here:
http://www.grandstream.com/support Reproduction or transmittal of the entire or any part, in any form or by any means, electronic or print, for any purpose without the express written permission of Grandstream Networks, Inc. is not permitted. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 19 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 20 of 321 PRODUCT OVERVIEW TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table 1: Technical Specifications Interfaces Analog Telephone FXS Ports 2 ports (both with lifeline capability in case of power outage) PSTN Line FXO Ports UCM6204: 4 ports UCM6202: 2 ports UCM6208: 8 ports Network Interfaces UCM6202/6204: Dual Gigabit RJ45 ports with integrated PoE Plus
(IEEE 802.3at-2009) UCM6208: Single Gigabit RJ45 port with integrated PoE Plus (IEEE 802.3at-2009) NAT Router Yes, UCM6204/UCM6208 only Peripheral Ports USB, SD LED Indicators Power/Ready, Network, PSTN Line, USB, SD LCD Display Reset Switch Voice/Video Capabilities Voice-over-Packet Capabilities 128x32 graphic LCD with DOWN and OK button Yes LEC with NLP Packetized Voice Protocol Unit, 128ms-tail-length carrier grade Line Echo Cancellation, Dynamic Jitter Buffer, Modem detection and auto-switch to G.711 Voice and Fax Codecs G.711 A-law/U-law, G.722, G.723.1 5.3K/6.3K, G.726, G.729A/B, iLBC
(30ms only), GSM, AAL2-G.726-32, ADPCM; T.38 Video Codecs H.264, H.263, H.263+, VP8 QoS Layer 3 QoS, Layer 2 QoS Signaling and Control DTMF Methods In Audio, RFC2833, and SIP INFO Provisioning Protocol and Plug-and-Play TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS, auto-discovery and auto-provisioning of Grandstream IP endpoints via ZeroConfig (DHCP Option 66/multicast SIP SUBSCRIBE/mDNS), eventlist between local and remote trunk Network Protocols Disconnect Methods Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 TCP/UDP/IP, RTP/RTCP, ICMP, ARP, DNS, DDNS, DHCP, NTP, TFTP, SSH, HTTP/HTTPS, PPPoE, SIP (RFC3261), STUN, SRTP, TLS Call Progress Tone, Polarity Reversal, Hook Flash Timing, Loop Current Disconnect, Busy Tone UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 21 of 321 Security Media Physical SRTP, TLS, HTTPS, SSH Universal Power Supply Output: 12VDC, 1.5A Input: 100-240VAC, 50-60Hz Dimensions Environmental Mounting UCM6202/6204: 226mm (L) x 155mm (W) x 34.5mm (H) UCM6208: 440mm (L) x 185mm (W) x 44mm (H) Operating: 32 - 104oF / 0 - 40oC, 10-90% (non-condensing) Storage: 14 - 140oF / -10 - 60oC UCM6202/6204: Wall mount and Desktop UCM6208: Rack mount and Desktop UCM6202: Unit weight 0.51kg, Package weight 0.94kg Weight UCM6204: Unit weight 0.51kg, Package weight 0.94kg UCM6208: Unit weight 2.23kg, Package weight 3.09kg Additional Features Multi-language Support English/Simplified Chinese/Traditional Chinese/Spanish/French/
Portuguese/German/Russian/Italian/Polish/Czech for Web UI;
Customizable IVR/voice prompts for English, Chinese, British English, German, Spanish, Greek, French, Italian, Dutch, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Swedish, Turkish, Hebrew, Arabic;
Customizable language pack to support any other languages Caller ID Bellcore/Telcordia, ETSI-FSK, ETSI-DTMF, SIN 227 - BT Polarity Reversal/ Wink Yes, with enable/disable option upon call establishment and termination Call Center Multiple configurable call queues, automatic call distribution (ACD) based on agent skills/availability busy level, in-queue announcement Customizable Auto Attendant Up to 5 layers of IVR (Interactive Voice Response) UCM6202: Concurrent audio calls up to 50, concurrent WebRTC calls up to 25 UCM6204: Concurrent audio calls up to 75, concurrent WebRTC Maximum Call Capacity calls up to 35 Conference Bridges UCM6208: Concurrent audio calls up to 100, concurrent WebRTC calls up to 50 Or up to 66% performance if calls are SRTP encrypted UCM6202/6204: Up to 3 password-protected conference bridges allowing up to 25 simultaneous PSTN or IP participants UCM6208: Up to 6 password-protected conference bridges allowing up to 32 simultaneous PSTN or IP participants Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 22 of 321 Call park, call forward, call transfer, DND, ring/hunt group, paging/intercom and etc FCC: Part 15 (CFR 47) Class B, Part 68 CE: EN55022 Class B, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3, EN60950-1, TBR21, RoHS A-TICK: AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class B, AS/NZS CISPR 24, AS/NZS 60950, AS/ACIF S002 and ITU-T K.21 (Basic Level) UL 60950 (power adapter) Call Features Compliance
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Note:
UCM6200 FXS ports lifeline functionality:
The UCM6200 FXS interfaces are metallic through to the FXO interfaces. If there is power outage, FXS1 port will fail over to FXO 1 port, FXS 2 port will fail over to FXO 2 port. The user can still access the PSTN connected with the FXO interfaces from FXS interfaces. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 23 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 24 of 321 INSTALLATION Before deploying and configuring the UCM6200 series, the device needs to be properly powered up and connected to network. This section describes detailed information on installation, connection and warranty policy of the UCM6200 series. EQUIPMENT PACKAGING Table 2: UCM6202/UCM6204 Equipment Packaging Main Case Power Adaptor Ethernet Cable Quick Installation Guide GPL License Yes (1) Yes (1) Yes (1) Yes (1) Yes (1) CONNECT YOUR UCM6200 CONNECT THE UCM6202 Figure 1: UCM6202 Front View Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 25 of 321 Figure 2: UCM6202 Back View To set up the UCM6202, follow the steps below:
1. Connect one end of an RJ-45 Ethernet cable into the WAN port of the UCM6202. 2. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable into the uplink port of an Ethernet switch/hub. 3. Connect the 12V DC power adapter into the 12V DC power jack on the back of the UCM6202. Insert the main plug of the power adapter into a surge-protected power outlet. 4. Wait for the UCM6202 to boot up. The LCD in the front will show the device hardware information when the boot process is done. 5. Once the UCM6202 is successfully connected to network, the LED indicator for WAN in the front will be in solid green and the LCD shows up the IP address. 6.
(Optional) Connect PSTN lines from the wall jack to the FXO ports; connect analog lines (phone and Fax) to the FXS ports. CONNECT THE UCM6204 Figure 3: UCM6204 Front View Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 26 of 321 Figure 4: UCM6204 Back View To set up the UCM6204, follow the steps below:
1. Connect one end of an RJ-45 Ethernet cable into the WAN port of the UCM6204. 2. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable into the uplink port of an Ethernet switch/hub. 3. Connect the 12V DC power adapter into the 12V DC power jack on the back of the UCM6204. Insert the main plug of the power adapter into a surge-protected power outlet. 4. Wait for the UCM6204 to boot up. The LCD in the front will show the device hardware information when the boot process is done. 5. Once the UCM6204 is successfully connected to network, the LED indicator for WAN in the front will be in solid green and the LCD shows up the IP address. 6.
(Optional) Connect PSTN lines from the wall jack to the FXO ports; connect analog lines (phone and Fax) to the FXS ports. CONNECT THE UCM6208 To set up the UCM6208, follow the steps below:
1. Connect one end of an RJ-45 Ethernet cable into the LAN port of the UCM6208. 2. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable into the uplink port of an Ethernet switch/hub. 3. Connect the 12V DC power adapter into the 12V DC power jack on the back of the UCM6208. Insert the main plug of the power adapter into a surge-protected power outlet. 4. Wait for the UCM6208 to boot up. The LCD in the front will show the device hardware information when the boot process is done. 5. Once the UCM6208 is successfully connected to network, the LED indicator for NETWORK in the front will be in solid green and the LCD shows up the IP address. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 27 of 321 6.
(Optional) Connect PSTN lines from the wall jack to the FXO ports; connect analog lines (phone and Fax) to the FXS ports. Figure 5: UCM6208 Front View Figure 6: UCM6208 Back View SAFETY COMPLIANCES The UCM6200 series IP PBX complies with FCC/CE and various safety standards. The UCM6200 power adapter is compliant with the UL standard. Use the universal power adapter provided with the UCM6200 package only. The manufacturers warranty does not cover damages to the device caused by unsupported power adapters. WARRANTY If the UCM6200 series IP PBX was purchased from a reseller, please contact the company where the device was purchased for replacement, repair or refund. If the device was purchased directly from Grandstream, contact our Technical Support Team for a RMA (Return Materials Authorization) number before the product is returned. Grandstream reserves the right to remedy warranty policy without prior notification.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------
Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 28 of 321 Warning:
Use the power adapter provided with the UCM6200 series IP PBX. Do not use a different power adapter as this may damage the device. This type of damage is not covered under warranty.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 29 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 30 of 321 GETTING STARTED The UCM6200 series provides LCD interface, LED indication and web GUI configuration interface. The LCD displays hardware, software and network information. Users could also navigate in the LCD menu for device information and basic network configuration. The LED indication at the front of the device provides interface connection and activity status. The web GUI gives users access to all the configurations and options for UCM6200 series setup. This section provides step-by-step instructions on how to use the LCD menu, LED indicators and Web GUI of the UCM6200 series. Once the basic settings are done, users could start making calls from UCM6200 extension registered on a SIP phone as described at the end of this section. USE THE LCD MENU Default LCD Display When the device is powered up, the LCD will show device model (e.g., UCM6204), hardware version
(e.g., V1.0A) and IP address. Press "Down" button and the system time will be displayed as well. Menu Access Press "OK" button to start browsing menu options. Please see menu options in [Table 3: LCD Menu Options]. Menu Navigation Press the "Down" arrow key to browser different menu options. Press the "OK" button to select an entry. Exit If "Back" option is available in the menu, select it to go back to the previous menu. For "Device Info"
"Network Info" and "Web Info" which do not have "Back" option, simply press the "OK" button to go back to the previous menu. Also, the LCD will display default idle screen after staying in menu option for 15 seconds. LCD Backlight The LCD backlight will be on upon key pressing. The backlight will go off after the LCD stays in idle for 30 seconds. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 31 of 321 Table 3: LCD Menu Options View Events Critical Events Other Events Hardware: Hardware version number Software: Software version number Device Info P/N: Part number WAN MAC: WAN side MAC address (UCM6202/UCM6204 only) LAN MAC: LAN side MAC address Uptime: System up time For UCM6208:
LAN Mode: DHCP, Static IP, or PPPoE LAN IP: IP address LAN Subnet Mask For UCM6202/UCM6204:
Network Info WAN Mode: DHCP, Static IP, or PPPoE WAN IP: IP address WAN Subnet Mask LAN IP: IP address LAN Subnet Mask For UCM6208:
Network Menu LAN Mode: Select LAN mode as DHCP, Static IP or PPPoE Static Route Reset: Click to reset the static route setting For UCM6202/UCM6204:
WAN Mode: Select WAN mode as DHCP, Static IP or PPPoE Static Route Reset: Click to reset the static route setting Reboot Factory Reset LCD Test Patterns Factory Menu Press "OK" to start. Then press "Down" button to test different LCD patterns. When done, press "OK" button to exit. Fan Mode Select "Auto" or "On". LED Test Patterns Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 32 of 321 Select "All On" "All Off" or "Blinking" and check LED status. RTC Test Patterns Select "2022-02-22 22:22" or "2011-01-11 11:11" to start the RTC
(Real-Time Clock) test pattern. Then check the system time from LCD idle screen by pressing "DOWN" button, or from web GUI->System Status->General page. Reboot the device manually after the RTC test is done. Hardware Testing Select "Test SVIP" to perform SVIP test on the device. This is mainly for factory testing purpose which verifies the hardware connection inside the device. The diagnostic result will display in the LCD after the test is done. Web Info Protocol: Web access protocol. HTTP or HTTPS. By default it's HTTPS Port: Web access port number. By default it's 8089 Enable SSH: Enable SSH access. SSH Switch Disable SSH: Disable SSH access. By default the SSH access is disabled. USE THE LED INDICATORS The UCM6200 has LED indicators in the front to display connection status. The following table shows the status definitions. Table 4: UCM6202/UCM6204 LED INDICATORS LED Indicator LAN WAN USB SD FXS (Phone/Fax) FXO (Telco Line) LED Status Solid: Connected Flashing: Data Transferring OFF: Not Connected Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 33 of 321 Table 5: UCM6208 LED INDICATORS LED Status Solid: Connected OFF: Not Connected Solid: Connected Flashing: Data Transferring OFF: Not Connected LED NETWORK ACT USB SD Phone (FXS) Line (FXO) USE THE WEB GUI ACCESS WEB GUI The UCM6200 embedded Web server responds to HTTP/HTTPS GET/POST requests. Embedded HTML pages allow users to configure the device through a Web browser such as Microsoft IE, Mozilla Firefox, Google Chrome and etc. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 Figure 7: UCM6204 Web GUI Login Page UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 34 of 321 To access the Web GUI:
1. Connect the computer to the same network as the UCM6200. 2. Ensure the device is properly powered up and shows its IP address on the LCD. 3. Open a Web browser on the computer and enter the web GUI URL in the following format:
http(s)://IP-Address:Port where the IP-Address is the IP address displayed on the UCM6200 LCD. By default, the protocol is HTTPS and the Port number is 8089. For example, if the LCD shows 192.168.40.167, please enter the following in your web browser:
https://192.168.40.167:8089 4. Enter the administrators login and password to access the Web Configuration Menu. The default administrator's username and password is "admin" and "admin". It is highly recommended to change the default password after login for the first time.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Note:
By default, the UCM6200 has "Redirect From Port 80" enabled. Therefore, if users type in the UCM6200 IP address in the web browser, the web page will be automatically redirected to the page using HTTPS and port 8089. For example, if the LCD shows 192.168.40.167, please enter 192.168.40.167 in your web browser and the web page will be redirected to:
https://192.168.40.167:8089 The option "Redirect From Port 80" can be configured under the UCM6200 web GUI->Settings->HTTP Server.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 35 of 321 SETUP WIZARD When the user logs in the UCM6200 web UI for the first time, a setup wizard will guide the user to set up basic configuration. Configurations in setup wizard includes: Time zone, Change password, Network settings, Extensions, Trunk and routes. Figure 8: UCM6200 Setup Wizard During the wizard, the user can quit the setup wizard at any time to start over with manual configuration. At the last step of the wizard, the user will be provided with summary for review, before the configuration is loaded. Once the setup is completed, the system is ready to go. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 36 of 321 WEB GUI CONFIGURATIONS There are four main sections in the Web GUI for users to view the PBX status, configure and manage the PBX. Status: Displays PBX status, System Status, System Events and CDR. PBX: To configure extensions, trunks, call routes, zero config for auto provisioning, call features, internal options, IAX settings and SIP settings. Settings: To configure user management, network settings, firewall settings, change password, LDAP Server, HTTP Server, Email Settings, Time Settings, NTP server, recording storage and login timeout. Maintenance: To perform firmware upgrade, backup configurations, cleaner setup, reset/reboot, syslog setup and troubleshooting. WEB GUI LANGUAGES Currently the UCM6200 series web GUI supports English, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Spanish, French, Portuguese, Russian, Italian, Polish, German and etc. Users can select the displayed language in web GUI login page, or at the upper right of the web GUI after logging in. Figure 9: UCM6200 Web GUI Language Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 37 of 321 SAVE AND APPLY CHANGES Click on "Save" button after configuring the web GUI options in one page. After saving all the changes, make sure click on "Apply Changes" button on the upper right of the web page to submit all the changes. If the change requires reboot to take effect, a prompted message will pop up for you to reboot the device. MAKE YOUR FIRST CALL Power up the UCM6200 and your SIP end point phone. Connect both devices to the network. Then follow the steps below to make your first call. 1. Log in the UCM6200 web GUI, go to PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Extensions. 2. Click on "Create New SIP Extension" to create a new extension. You will need User ID, Password and Voicemail Password information to register and use the extension later. 3. Register the extension on your phone with the SIP User ID, SIP server and SIP Password information. The SIP server address is the UCM6200 IP address. 4. When your phone is registered with the extension, dial *97 to access the voicemail box. Enter the Voicemail Password once you hear "Password" voice prompt. 5. Once successfully logged in to the voicemail, you will be prompted with the Voice Mail Main menu. 6. You are successfully connected to the PBX system now. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 38 of 321 SYSTEM SETTINGS This section explains configurations for system-wide parameters on the UCM6200. System settings are under Settings tag on UCM6200 web GUI. System settings include User Management, Network Settings, Firewall, Change Password, LDAP server, HTTP server, Email settings, Time Settings, NTP Server, Recordings Storage and Login Timeout settings. USER MANAGEMENT User management is on web GUI->Settings->User Management page. User could create multiple accounts for different administrators to log in the UCM6200 web GUI. Additionally, the system will automatically create user accounts along with creating new extensions for extension users to login to the web UI using their extension number and password. All existing user accounts for web UI login will be displayed on User Management page as shown in the following figure. Figure 10: User Management Page Display USER PRIVILEGES Three privilege levels are supported:
Super Admin Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 39 of 321
- This is the highest privilege. Super Admin can access all pages on UCM6200 web GUI, change configuration for all options and execute all the operations.
- Super Admin can create, edit and delete one or more users with Admin privilege
- Super Admin can edit and delete one or more users with Consumer privilege
- Super Admin can view operation logs generated by all users.
- By default, the user account admin is configured with Super Admin privilege and its the only user with Super Admin privilege. The User Name and Privilege level cannot be changed or deleted.
- Super Admin could change its own login password on web UI->Settings->Change Password page.
- Super Admin could view operations done by all the users in web UI->Settings->User Management->Operation Log. Admin
- Users with Admin privilege can only be created by Super Admin user.
-
Admin privilege users are not allowed to access the following pages:
Maintenance->Upgrade Maintenance->Backup Maintenance->Cleaner Maintenance->Reset/Reboot Settings->User Management->Operation Log
-
Admin privilege users cannot create new users for login. Consumer
- A user account for web UI login is created automatically by the system when a new extension is created.
- The user could log in the web UI with the extension number and password to access user information, extension configuration and CDR of that extension. CREATE NEW WEB UI USER When logged in as Super Admin, click on to create a new account for web UI user. The following dialog will prompt. Configure the parameters as shown in below table. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 40 of 321 Figure 11: Create New User Table 6: User Management->Create New User Configure a username to identify the user which will be required in web UI login. Letters, digits and underscore are allowed in the user name. Configure a password for this user which will be required in web UI login. Letters, digits and underscore are allowed. This is the role of the web UI user. Currently only Admin is supported when Super Admin creates a new user. Enter the necessary information to keep a record for this user. User Name User Password Privilege Department Fax Email Address First Name Last Name Home Number Phone Number Once created, the Super Admin can edit the users by clicking on or delete the user by clicking on
. Figure 12: User Management New Users Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 41 of 321 USER PORTAL The user could log in web UI user portal using the extension number and password. When there is an extension created in the UCM6200, the corresponding user account for the extension is automatically created. The user portal allows limited access including user information, extension configuration and CDR information of the extension. The login username is the extension number and the password is configured by Super Admin. The following figure shows the dialog of editing the account information by Super Admin. The User Name must be the extension number and its not configurable. Figure 13: Edit User Information by Super Admin The following figure shows an example of login page using extension number 1000 as the username. After login, the web UI displays is shown as below. Figure 14: User Portal Login Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 42 of 321 Figure 15: User Portal Layout For the configuration parameter information in each page, please refer to
[Table 6: User Management->Create New User] for options in User Portal->Basic Information->User Information page;
please refer to [EXTENSIONS] for options in User Portal->Basic Information->Extension page; please refer to [CDR] for User Portal->Basic Information->CDR page. CONCURRENT MULTI-USER LOGIN When there are multiple web UI users created, concurrent multi-user login is supported on the UCM6200. Multiple users could edit options and have configurations take effect simultaneously. However, if different users are editing the same option or making the same operation (by clicking on Apply Changes), a prompt will pop up as shown in the following figure. Figure 16: Multiple User Operation Error Prompt OPERATION LOG Super Admin has the authority to view operation logs on UCM6200 web GUI->Settings->User Management->Operation Log page. Operation logs list operations done by all the web UI users, for example, web UI login, creating trunk, creating outbound rule and etc. There are 6 columns to record the operation details Date, User Name, IP Address, Results, Page Operation and Specific Operation. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 43 of 321 Figure 17: Operation Logs The operation log can be sorted and filtered for easy access. Click on the header of each column to sort. For example, clicking on "Date" will sort the logs according to operation date and time. Clicking on "Date"
again will reverse the order. Date User Name IP Address Results Page Operation Table 7: Operation Log Column Header The date and time when the operation is executed. The username of the user who performed the operation. The IP address from which the operation is made. The result of the operation. The page where the operation is made. For example, login, logout, delete user, create trunk and etc. Specific Operation Click on to view the options and values configured by this operation. User could also filter the operation logs by time condition, IP address and/or username. Configure these conditions and then click on
. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 44 of 321 Figure 18: Operation Logs Filter The above figure shows an example that operations made by user support on device with IP 192.168.40.173 from 2014-11-01 00:00 to 2014-11-06 15:38 are filtered out and displayed. To delete operation logs, users can perform filtering first and then click on to delete the filtered result of operation logs. Or users can click on to delete all operation logs at once. CHANGE PASSWORD After logging in the UCM6200 web UI for the first time, it is highly recommended for users to change the default password "admin" to a more complicated password for security purpose. Follow the steps below to change the Web UI access password. 1. Go to Web UI->Settings->User Management-> Change Password page. 2. Enter the old password first. 3. Enter the new password and re-type the new password to confirm. The new password has to be at least 4 characters. The maximum length of the password is 30 characters. 4. Configure the Email Address that is used when login credential is lost. 5. Click on "Save" and the user will be automatically logged out. 6. Once the web page comes back to the login page again, enter the username "admin" and the new password to login. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 45 of 321 Figure 19 : Change Password Enter Old Password Enter the Old Password for UCM6200 Enter New Password Enter the New Password for UCM6200 Retype New Password Email Address Retype the New Password for UCM6200 Configure the Email address for UCM6200. In case login credential is lost, Email address is used to retrieve login credential CHANGE BINDNG EMAIL UCM6200 allows user to configure binding email in case login password is lost. UCM6200 login credential will be sent to the designated email address. The feature can be found under web UI->Settings->User Management->Change Binding Email. Figure 20: Change Binding Email Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 46 of 321 Table 8: Change Binding Email option Enter the password of the account Enter the current login user credential for UCM6200 Email Address Email Address is used to retrieve password when password is lost NETWORK SETTINGS After successfully connecting the UCM6200 to the network for the first time, users could login the Web GUI and go to Settings->Network Settings to configure the network parameters for the device. Additional network functions and settings are available for UCM6202 and UCM6204:
UCM6202/UCM6204 supports Route/Switch/Dual mode functions. In this section, all the available network setting options are listed for all models. Select each tab in web GUI->Settings->Network Settings page to configure LAN settings, WAN settings (UCM6202/UCM6204 only), 802.1X and Port Forwarding (UCM6202/UCM6204 only). BASIC SETTINGS Please refer to the following tables for basic network configuration parameters on UCM6202/UCM6204, and UCM6208 respectively. Method Table 9: UCM6202/UCM6204 Network Settings->Basic Settings Select "Route", "Switch" or "Dual" mode on the network interface of UCM6200. The default setting is "Route". Route WAN port interface will be used for uplink connection. LAN port interface will be used to serve as router. Switch WAN port interface will be used for uplink connection. LAN port interface will be used as bridge for PC connection. Dual Both ports can be used for uplink connection. Users will need assign LAN 1 or LAN 2 as the default interface in option "Default Interface" and configure
"Gateway IP" for this interface. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 47 of 321 Preferred DNS Server Enter the preferred DNS server address. If Preferred DNS is used, UCM will try to use it as Primary DNS server. WAN (when "Method" is set to "Route") IP Method IP Address Subnet Mask Select DHCP, Static IP, or PPPoE. The default setting is DHCP. Enter the IP address for static IP settings. The default setting is 192.168.0.160. Enter the subnet mask address for static IP settings. The default setting is 255.255.0.0. Gateway IP Enter the gateway IP address for static IP settings. The default setting is 0.0.0.0. DNS Server 1 Enter the DNS server 1 address for static IP settings. The default setting is 0.0.0.0. DNS Server 2 Enter the DNS server 2 address for static IP settings. User Name Password Enter the user name to connect via PPPoE. Enter the password to connect via PPPoE. Layer 2 QoS Assign the VLAN tag of the layer 2 QoS packets for WAN port. The default value 802.1Q/VLAN Tag is 0. Layer 2 QoS 802.1p Assign the priority value of the layer 2 QoS packets for WAN port. The default Priority Value value is 0. LAN (when Method is set to "Route") IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to LAN port. The default setting is 192.168.2.1. Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask. The default setting is 255.255.255.0. DHCP Server Enable Enable or disable DHCP server capability. The default setting is "Yes". DNS Server 1 Enter DNS server address 1. The default setting is 8.8.8.8. DNS Server 2 Enter DNS server address 2. The default setting is 208.67.222.222. Allow IP Address From Enter the DHCP IP Pool starting address. The default setting is 192.168.2.100. Allow IP Address To Enter the DHCP IP Pool ending address. The default setting is 192.168.2.254. Default IP Lease Time Enter the IP lease time (in seconds). The default setting is 43200. LAN (when Method is set to "Switch") IP Method IP Address Subnet Mask Select DHCP, Static IP, or PPPoE. The default setting is DHCP. Enter the IP address for static IP settings. The default setting is 192.168.0.160. Enter the subnet mask address for static IP settings. The default setting is 255.255.0.0. Gateway IP Enter the gateway IP address for static IP settings. The default setting is 0.0.0.0. DNS Server 1 Enter the DNS server 1 address for static IP settings. The default setting is 0.0.0.0. DNS Server 2 Enter the DNS server 2 address for static IP settings. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 48 of 321 User Name Password Enter the user name to connect via PPPoE. Enter the password to connect via PPPoE. Layer 2 QoS Assign the VLAN tag of the layer 2 QoS packets for LAN port. The default value is 802.1Q/VLAN Tag 0. Layer 2 QoS 802.1p Assign the priority value of the layer 2 QoS packets for LAN port. The default Priority Value value is 0. LAN 1 / LAN 2 (when Method is set to "Dual") If "Dual" is selected as "Method", users will need assign the default interface to be Default Interface LAN 1 (mapped to UCM6202 WAN port) or LAN 2 (mapped to UCM6202 LAN port) and then configure network settings for LAN 1/LAN 2. The default interface is IP Method IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP DNS Server 1 LAN 2. Select DHCP, Static IP, or PPPoE. The default setting is DHCP. Enter the IP address for static IP settings. The default setting is 192.168.0.160. Enter the subnet mask address for static IP settings. The default setting is 255.255.0.0. Enter the gateway IP address for static IP settings when the port is assigned as default interface. The default setting is 0.0.0.0. Enter the DNS server 1 address for static IP settings. The default setting is 0.0.0.0. DNS Server 2 Enter the DNS server 2 address for static IP settings. User Name Password Enter the user name to connect via PPPoE. Enter the password to connect via PPPoE. Layer 2 QoS Assign the VLAN tag of the layer 2 QoS packets for LAN port. The default value is 802.1Q/VLAN Tag 0. Layer 2 QoS 802.1p Assign the priority value of the layer 2 QoS packets for LAN port. The default Priority Value value is 0. Preferred DNS Server IP Method IP Address Table 10: UCM6208 Network Settings->Basic Settings Enter the preferred DNS server address. If Preferred DNS is used, UCM will try to use it as Primary DNS server. Select DHCP, Static IP, or PPPoE. The default setting is DHCP. Enter the IP address for static IP settings. Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask address for static IP settings. Gateway IP Enter the gateway IP address for static IP settings. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 49 of 321 DNS Server 1 Enter the DNS server 1 address for static IP settings. DNS Server 2 Enter the DNS server 2 address for static IP settings. User Name Password Enter the user name to connect via PPPoE. Enter the password to connect via PPPoE. Layer 2 QoS Assign the VLAN tag of the layer 2 QoS packets for LAN port. The default value is 802.1Q/VLAN Tag 0. Layer 2 QoS 802.1p Assign the priority value of the layer 2 QoS packets for LAN port. The default Priority Value value is 0. Method: Route When the UCM6200 has method set to Route in network settings, WAN port interface is used for uplink connection and LAN port interface is used as a router. Please see a sample diagram below. Figure 21: UCM6200 Network Interface Method: Route Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 50 of 321 Method: Switch WAN port interface is used for uplink connection; LAN port interface is used as bridge for PC connection. Figure 22: UCM6200 Network Interface Method: Switch Method: Dual Both WAN port and LAN port are used for uplink connection. Users will need assign LAN 1 or LAN 2 as the default interface in option "Default Interface" and configure "Gateway IP" if static IP is used for this interface. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 51 of 321 Figure 23: UCM6200 Network Interface Method: Dual 802.1X IEEE 802.1X is an IEEE standard for port-based network access control. It provides an authentication mechanism to device before the device is allowed to access Internet or other LAN resources. The UCM6200 supports 802.1X as a supplicant/client to be authenticated. The following diagram and figure show UCM6200 uses 802.1X mode EAP-MD5 on WAN port as client in the network to access Internet. Figure 24: UCM6200 Using 802.1X as Client Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 52 of 321 Figure 25: UCM6200 Using 802.1X EAP-MD5 The following table shows the configuration parameters for 802.1X on UCM6200. Identity and MD5 password are required for authentication, which should be provided by the network administrator obtained from the RADIUS server. If EAP-TLS or EAP-PEAPv0/MSCHAPv2 is used as the 802.1X mode, users will also need upload 802.1X CA Certificate and 802.1X Client Certificate, which should be also generated from the RADIUS server. Table 11: UCM6200 Network Settings->802.1X Select 802.1X mode. The default setting is "Disable". The supported 802.1X 802.1X Mode mode are:
EAP-MD5 EAP-TLS EAP-PEAPv0/MSCHAPv2 Identity Enter 802.1X mode identity information. MD5 Password Enter 802.1X mode MD5 password information. 802.1X Certificate Select 802.1X certificate from local PC and then upload. Select 802.1X client certificate from local PC and then upload. 802.1X Client Certificate STATIC ROUTES The UCM6200 provides users static routing capability that allows the device to use manually configured routes, rather than information only from dynamic routing or gateway configured in the UCM6200 web GUI->Network Settings->Basic Settings to forward traffic. It can be used to define a route when no other routes are available or necessary, or used in complementary with existing routing on the UCM6200 as a failover backup, and etc. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 53 of 321 Click on to create a new static route. The configuration parameters are listed in the table below. Once added, users can select to edit the static route. Select to delete the static route. Table 12: UCM6200 Network Settings->Static Routes Configure the destination IP address or the destination IP subnet for the UCM6200 to reach using the static route. Destination Example:
IP address - 192.168.66.4 IP subnet - 192.168.66.0 Configure the subnet mask for the above destination address. If left blank, the Netmask default value is 255.255.255.255. Example:
255.255.255.0 Configure the gateway address so that the UCM6200 can reach the destination via this gateway. Gateway address is optional. Gateway Example:
192.168.40.5 Specify the network interface on the UCM6200 to reach the destination using the Interface static route. LAN interface is eth0; WAN interface is eth1. Static routes configuration can be reset from LCD menu->Network Menu. The following diagram shows a sample application of static route usage on UCM6204. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 54 of 321 Figure 26: UCM6204 Static Route Sample The network topology of the above diagram is as below:
Network 192.168.69.0 has IP phones registered to UCM6204 LAN 1 address Network 192.168.40.0 has IP phones registered to UCM6204 LAN 2 address Network 192.168.66.0 has IP phones registered to UCM6204 via VPN Network 192.168.40.0 has VPN connection established with network 192.168.66.0 In this network, by default the IP phones in network 192.168.69.0 are unable to call IP phones in network 192.168.66.0 when registered on different interfaces on the UCM6204. Therefore, we need configure a static route on the UCM6204 so that the phones in isolated networks can make calls between each other. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 Figure 27: UCM6204 Static Route Configuration UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 55 of 321 PORT FORWORDING The UCM network interface supports router function which provides users the ability to do port forwarding. If the UCM6202/UCM6204 LAN mode is set to "Route" under web GUI->Settings->Network Settings->Basic Settings page, port forwarding is available for configuration. The port forwarding configuration is under web GUI->Settings->Network Settings->Port Forwarding page. Please see related settings in the table below. WAN Port Table 13: UCM6202/UCM6204 Network Settings->Port Forwarding Specify the WAN port number or a range of WAN ports. Up to 8 ports can be configured. Note:
When it is set to a range, WAN port and LAN port must be configured with the same range, such as WAN port: 1000-1005 and LAN port: 1000-1005, and access from WAN port will be forwarded to the LAN port with the same port number, for example, WAN port 1000 will be port forwarding to LAN port 1000. LAN IP Specify the LAN IP address. Specify the LAN port number or a range of LAN ports. Note:
LAN Port When it is set to a range, WAN port and LAN port must be configured with the same range, such as WAN port: 1000-1005 and LAN port: 1000-1005, and access from WAN port will be forwarded to the LAN port with the same port number, for example, WAN port 1000 will be port forwarding to LAN port 1000. Protocol Type Select protocol type "UDP Only", "TCP Only" or "TCP/UDP" for the forwarding in the selected port. The default setting is "UDP Only". The following figures demonstrate a port forwarding example to provide phones web UI access to public side. The UCM6202/UCM6204 network mode is set to Route The UCM6202/UCM6204 WAN port is connected to uplink switch, with a public IP address configured, e.g. 1.1.1.1. The UCM6202/UCM6204 LAN port provides DHCP pool that connects to multiple phone devices in the LAN network 192.168.2.x. The UCM6202/UCM6204 is used as a router, with gateway address 192.168.2.1 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 56 of 321 There is a GXP2160 connected under the LAN interface network of the UCM6202/UCM6204. It obtains IP address 192.168.2.100 from UCM6200 DHCP pool On the UCM6202/UCM6204 web UI->Settings->Network Settings->Port Forwarding, configure a port forwarding entry as the figure shows below. WAN Port: This is the port opened up on the WAN side for access purpose. LAN IP: This is the GXP2160 IP address, under the LAN interface network of the UCM6202/UCM6204. Protocol Type: We select TCP here for web UI access using HTTP. Figure 28: UCM6202/UCM6204 Port Forwarding Configuration This will allow users to access the GXP2160 web UI from public side, by typing in address 1.1.1.1:8088. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 57 of 321 Figure 29: GXP2160 Web Access Using UCM6202 Port Forwarding DDNS SETTINGS DDNS setting allows user to access UCM6200 via domain name instead of IP address. The UCM supports DDNS service from the following DDNS provider:
dydns.org noip.com freedns.afraid.org zoneedit.com oray.net Here is an example of using noip.com for DDNS. 1. Register domain in DDNS service provider. Please note the UCM6200 needs to have public IP access. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 58 of 321 Figure 30: Register Domain Name on noip.com 2. On web UI->Settings->Network Settings->DDNS Settings, enable DDNS service and configure username, password and host name. Figure 31: UCM6200 DDNS Setting 3. Now you can use domain name instead of IP address to connect to the UCM6200 web UI. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 59 of 321 Figure 32: Using Domain Name to Connect to UCM6200 FIREWALL The UCM6200 provides users firewall configurations to prevent certain malicious attack to the UCM6200 system. Users could configure to allow, restrict or reject specific traffic through the device for security and bandwidth purpose. The UCM6200 also provides Fail2ban feature for authentication errors in SIP REGISTER, INVITE and SUBSCRIBE. To configure firewall settings in the UCM6200, go to Web UI->Settings->Firewall page. STATIC DEFENSE Under Web GUI->Settings->Firewall->Static Defense page, users will see the following information:
Current service information with port, process and type. Typical firewall settings. Custom firewall settings. The following table shows a sample current service status running on the UCM6200. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 60 of 321 Port 7777 389 22 80 Table 14: UCM6200 Firewall->Static Defense->Current Service Process Asterisk Slapd Type Protocol or Service tcp/IPv4 SIP tcp/IPv4 LDAP Dropbear tcp/IPv4 SSH Lighthttpd tcp/IPv4 HTTP 8089 Lighthttpd tcp/IPv4 HTTPS 69 9090 6060 5060 4569 5353 Opentftpd udp/IPv4 TFTP Asterisk udp/IPv4 SIP zero_config udp/IPv4 UCM6200 zero_config service Asterisk Asterisk udp/IPv4 udp/IPv4 SIP SIP zero_config udp/IPv4 UCM6200 zero_config service 37435 Syslogd udp/IPv4 Syslog For typical firewall settings, users could configure the following options on the UCM6200. Table 15: Typical Firewall Settings Ping Defense Enable Ping-of-Death Defense Enable If enabled, ICMP response will not be allowed for Ping request. The default setting is disabled. To enable or disable it, click on the check box for the LAN or WAN (UCM6202/UCM6204) interface. Enable to prevent Ping-of-Death attack to the device. The default setting is disabled. To enable or disable it, click on the check box for the LAN or WAN
(UCM6202/UCM6204) interface. Under "Custom Firewall Settings", users could create new rules to accept, reject or drop certain traffic going through the UCM6200. To create new rule, click on "Create New Rule" button and a new window will pop up for users to specify rule options. Right next to "Create New Rule" button, there is a checkbox for option "Reject Rules". If its checked, all the rules will be rejected except the firewall rules listed below. In the firewall rules, only when there is a rule that meets all the following requirements, the option "Reject Rules" will be allowed to check:
Action: "Accept"
Type "In"
Destination port is set to the system login port (e.g., by default 8089) Protocol is not UDP Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 61 of 321 Figure 33: Create New Firewall Rule Table 16: Firewall Rule Settings Rule Name Specify the Firewall rule name to identify the firewall rule. Select the action for the Firewall to perform. Action ACCEPT REJECT DROP Select the traffic type. IN Type If selected, users will need specify the network interface "LAN" or "WAN"
(for UCM6202/UCM6204) for the incoming traffic. OUT Select the service type. FTP SSH Telnet TFTP HTTP LDAP Custom Service If "Custom" is selected, users will need specify Source (IP and port), Destination (IP and port) and Protocol (TCP, UDP or Both) for the service. Please note if the source or the destination field is left blank, it will be used as "Anywhere". Save the change and click on "Apply" button. Then submit the configuration by clicking on "Apply Changes" on the upper right of the web page. The new rule will be listed at the bottom of the page with sequence number, rule name, action, protocol, type, source, destination and operation. More operations below:
Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 62 of 321 Click on to edit the rule Click on to delete the rule DYNAMIC DEFENSE Dynamic defense is supported on the UCM6200 series. It can blacklist hosts dynamically when the LAN mode is set to "Route" under web GUI->Settings->Network Settings->Basic Settings page. If enabled, the traffic coming into the UCM6200 can be monitored, which helps prevent massive connection attempts or brute force attacks to the device. The blacklist can be created and updated by the UCM6200 firewall, which will then be displayed in the web page. Please refer to the following table for dynamic defense options on the UCM6200. Table 17: UCM6200 Firewall Dynamic Defense Dynamic Defense Enable Enable dynamic defense. The default setting is disabled. Configure the dynamic defense periodic time interval (in minutes). If the Periodical Time Interval number of TCP connections from a host exceeds the connection threshold within this period, this host will be added into Blacklist. The valid value is between 1 and 59 when dynamic defense is turned on. The default setting is 59. Blacklist Update Configure the blacklist update time interval (in seconds). The default setting is Interval 120. Connection Threshold Configure the connection threshold. Once the number of connections from the same host reaches the threshold, it will be added into the blacklist. The default setting is 100. Configure the dynamic defense whitelist. Dynamic Defense Whitelist For example, 192.168.1.3 192.168.1.4 The following figure shows a configuration example like this:
If a host at IP address 192.168.40.7 initiates more than 20 TCP connections to the UCM6200 within 1 minute, it will be added into UCM6200 blacklist. This host 192.168.40.7 will be blocked by the UCM6200 for 300 seconds. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 63 of 321 Since IP address 192.168.40.5 is in whitelist, if the host at IP address 192.168.40.5 initiates more than 20 TCP connections to the UCM6200 within 1 minute, it will not be added into UCM6200 blacklist. It can still establish TCP connection with the UCM6200. FAIL2BAN Figure 34: Configure Dynamic Defense Fail2Ban feature on the UCM6200 provides intrusion detection and prevention for authentication errors in SIP REGISTER, INVITE and SUBSCRIBE. Once the entry is detected within "Max Retry Duration", the UCM6200 will take action to forbid the host for certain period as defined in "Banned Duration". This feature helps prevent SIP brute force attacks to the PBX system. Global Settings Table 18: Fail2Ban Settings Enable Fail2Ban Fail2Ban" and "Asterisk Service" are turned on in order to use Fail2Ban for SIP Enable Fail2Ban. The default setting is disabled. Please make sure both "Enable authentication on the UCM6200. Banned Duration Max Retry Duration MaxRetry Configure the duration (in seconds) for the detected host to be banned. The default setting is 300. If set to -1, the host will be always banned. Within this duration (in seconds), if a host exceeds the max times of retry as defined in "MaxRetry", the host will be banned. The default setting is 5. Configure the number of authentication failures during "Max Retry Duration"
before the host is banned. The default setting is 10. Fail2Ban Whitelist Configure IP address, CIDR mask or DNS host in the whiltelist. Fail2Ban will not Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 64 of 321 ban the host with matching address in this list. Up to 5 addresses can be added Local Settings into the list. Asterisk Service sure both "Enable Fail2Ban" and "Asterisk Service" are turned on in order to use Enable Asterisk service for Fail2Ban. The default setting is disabled. Please make Fail2Ban for SIP authentication on the UCM6200. Configure the listening port number for the service. Currently only 5060 (for UDP) is supported. Configure the number of authentication failures during "Max Retry Duration"
before the host is banned. The default setting is 10. Please make sure this option is properly configured as it will override the "MaxRetry" value under "Global Settings". Protocol MaxRetry LDAP SERVER The UCM6200 has an embedded LDAP server for users to manage corporate phonebook in a centralized manner. By default, the LDAP server has generated the first phonebook with PBX DN
"ou=pbx,dc=pbx,dc=com" based on the UCM6200 user extensions already. Users could add new phonebook with a different Phonebook DN for other external contacts. For example, "ou=people,dc=pbx,dc=com". All the phonebooks in the UCM6200 LDAP server have the same Base DN "dc=pbx,dc=com". Term Explanation:
cn= Common Name ou= Organization Unit dc= Domain Component These are all parts of the LDAP data Interchange Format, according to RFC 2849, which is how the LDAP tree is filtered. If users have the Grandstream phone provisioned by the UCM6200, the LDAP directory will be set up on the phone and can be used right away for users to access all phonebooks. Additionally, users could manually configure the LDAP client settings to manipulate the built-in LDAP server on the UCM6200. If the UCM6200 has multiple LDAP phonebooks created, in the LDAP client configuration, users could use "dc=pbx,dc=com" as Base DN to have access to all phonebooks on the Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 65 of 321 UCM6200 LDAP server, or use a specific phonebook DN, for example "ou=people,dc=pbx,dc=com", to access to phonebook with Phonebook DN "ou=people,dc=pbx,dc=com " only. UCM can also act as a LDAP client to download phonebook entries from other LDAP server. To access LDAP server and client settings, go to Web GUI->Settings->LDAP Server. LDAP SERVER CONFIGURATIONS The following figure shows the default LDAP server configurations on the UCM6200. Figure 35: LDAP Server Configurations The UCM6200 LDAP server supports anonymous access (read-only) by default. Therefore the LDAP client doesn't have to configure username and password to access the phonebook directory. The "Root DN" and
"Root Password" here are for LDAP management and configuration where users will need provide for authentication purpose before modifying the LDAP information. The default phonebook list in this LDAP server can be viewed and edited by clicking on for the first phonebook under LDAP Phonebook. Figure 36: Default LDAP Phonebook DN Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 66 of 321 Figure 37: Default LDAP Phonebook Attributes LDAP PHONEBOOK Users could use the default phonebook, edit the default phonebook, add new phonebook, import phonebook on the LDAP server as well as export phonebook from the LDAP server. The first phonebook with default phonebook dn "ou=pbx,dc=pbx,dc=com" displayed on the LDAP server page is for extensions in this PBX. Users cannot add or delete contacts directly. The contacts information will need to be modified via Web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Extensions first. The default LDAP phonebook will then be updated automatically. Figure 38: LDAP Server->LDAP Phonebook Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 67 of 321 Add new phonebook A new sibling phonebook of the default PBX phonebook can be added by clicking on "Add" under
"LDAP Phonebook" section. Figure 39: Add LDAP Phonebook Configure the "Phonebook Prefix" first. The "Phonebook DN" will be automatically filled in. For example, if configuring
"Phonebook Prefix" as
"people", the
"Phonebook DN" will be filled with
"ou=people,dc=pbx,dc=com". Once added, users can select to edit the phonebook attributes and contact list (see figure below), or select to delete the phonebook. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 Figure 40: Edit LDAP Phonebook UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 68 of 321 Import phonebook from your computer to LDAP server Click on Import Phonebook and a dialog will prompt as shown in the figure below. Figure 41: Import Phonebook The file to be imported must be a CSV file with UTF-8 encoding. Users can open the CSV file with Notepad and save it with UTF-8 encoding. Here is how a sample file looks like. Please note Account Number and Phonebook DN fields are required. Users could export a phonebook file from the UCM6200 LDAP phonebook section first and use it as a sample to start with. Figure 42: Phonebook CSV File Format The Phonebook DN field is the same Phonebook Prefix entry as when the user clicks on Add to create a new phonebook. Therefore, if the user enters phonebook in Phonebook DN field in the CSV file, the actual phonebook DN ou=phonebook,dc=pbx,dc=com will be automatically created by the UCM6200 once the CSV file is imported. In the CSV file, users can specify different phonebook DN fields for different contacts. If the phonebook DN already exists on the UCM6200 LDAP Phonebook, the contacts in the CSV file will be added into the existing phonebook. If the phonebook DN doesnt exist on the UCM6200 LDAP Phonebook, a new phonebook with this phonebook DN will be created. The sample phonebook CSV file in above picture will result in the following LDAP phonebook in the Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 69 of 321 UCM6200. Figure 43: LDAP Phonebook After Import As the default LDAP phonebook with DN ou=pbx,dc=pbx,dc=com cannot be edited or deleted in LDAP phonebook section, users cannot import contacts with Phonebook DN field pbx if existed in the CSV file. Export phonebook to your computer from UCM6200 LDAP server Select the checkbox for the LDAP phonebook and then click on Export Selected Phonebook to export the selected phonebook. The exported phonebook can be used as a record or a sample CSV file for the users to add more contacts in it and import to the UCM6200 again. Figure 44: Export Selected LDAP Phonebook LDAP CLIENT CONFIGURATIONS The configuration on LDAP client is similar when you use other LDAP servers. Here we provide an example on how to configure the LDAP client on the SIP end points to use the default PBX phonebook. Assuming the server base dn is "dc=pbx,dc=com", configure the LDAP clients as follows (case insensitive):
Server Address: LDAP server IP address Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 70 of 321 Base DN: dc=pbx,dc=com User Name: cn= LDAP server login name, dc=pbx, dc=com [matching LDAP server format]
Password: LDAP server login password Filter: (|(CallerIDName=%)(AccountNumber=%)) Port: 389 The following figure gives a sample configurations for UCM6200 acting as a LDAP client. Figure 45: LDAP Client Configurations To configure Grandstream IP phones as the LDAP client, please refer to the following example:
Server Address: The IP address or domain name of the UCM6200 Base DN: dc=pbx,dc=com User Name: Please leave this field empty Password: Please leave this field empty LDAP Name Attribute: CallerIDName Email Department FirstName LastName LDAP Number Attribute: AccountNumber MobileNumber HomeNumber Fax LDAP Number Filter: (AccountNumber=%) LDAP Name Filter: (CallerIDName=%) LDAP Display Name: AccountNumber CallerIDName LDAP Version: If existed, please select LDAP Version 3 Port: 389 The following figure shows the configuration information on a Grandstream GXP2200 to successfully use the LDAP server as configured in Figure 35: LDAP Server Configurations. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 71 of 321 Figure 46: GXP2200 LDAP Phonebook Configuration HTTP SERVER The UCM6200 embedded web server responds to HTTP/HTTPS GET/POST requests. Embedded HTML pages allow the users to configure the PBX through a Web browser such as Microsoft IE, Mozilla Firefox and Google Chrome. By default, the PBX can be accessed via HTTPS using Port 8089 (e.g., https://192.168.40.50:8089). Users could also change the access protocol and port as preferred under Web GUI->Settings->HTTP Server. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 72 of 321 Redirect From Port 80 Table 19: HTTP Server Settings Enable or disable redirect from port 80. On the PBX, the default access protocol is HTTPS and the default port number is 8089. When this option is enabled, the access using HTTP with Port 80 will be redirected to HTTPS with Port 8089. The default setting is "Enable". Select HTTP or HTTPS. The default setting is "HTTPS". This is also the Protocol Type protocol used for zero config when the end point device downloads the Port config file from the UCM6200. Specify port number to access the HTTP server. The default port number is 8089. Once the change is saved, the web page will be redirected to the login page using the new URL. Enter the username and password to login again. EMAIL SETTINGS The Email application on the UCM6200 can be used to send out alert event Emails, Fax (Fax-To-Email), Voicemail (Voicemail-To-Email) and etc. The configuration parameters can be accessed via Web GUI->Settings->Email Settings. Table 20: Email Settings TLS Enable Enable or disable TLS during transferring/submitting your Email to other SMTP server. The default setting is "Yes". Select Email type. MTA: Mail Transfer Agent. The Email will be sent from the configured domain. When MTA is selected, there is no need to set up SMTP Type server for it or no user login is required. However, the Emails sent Domain Server Username Password from MTA might be considered as spam by the target SMTP server. Client: Submit Emails to the SMTP server. A SMTP server is required and users need login with correct credentials. Specify the domain name to be used in the Email when using type "MTA". Specify the SMTP server when using type "Client". Username is required when using type "Client". Normally it's the Email address. Password to login for the above Username (Email address) is required when using type "Client". Display Name Specify the display name in the FROM header in the Email. Sender Specify the sender's Email address. For example, pbx@example.mycompany.com. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 73 of 321 The following figure shows a sample Email settings on the UCM6200, assuming the Email is using smtp.gmail.com as the SMTP server. Figure 47: UCM6200 Email Settings Once the configuration is finished, click on "Test". In the prompt, fill in a valid Email address to send a test Email to verify the Email settings on the UCM6200. TIME SETTINGS AUTO TIME UPDATING The current system time on the UCM6200 is displayed on the upper right of the web page. It can also be found under Web GUI->Status->System Status->General. To configure the UCM6200 to update time automatically, go to Web GUI->Settings->Time Settings->Time Auto Updating.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Note:
The configurations under Web GUI->Settings->Time Settings->Time Auto Updating page require reboot to take effect. Please consider configuring auto time updating related changes when setting up the UCM6200 for the first time to avoid service interrupt after installation and deployment in production.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 74 of 321 Table 21: Time Auto Updating Remote NTP Server synchronize the date and time. The default NTP server is Specify the URL or IP address of the NTP server for the UCM6200 to ntp.ipvideotalk.com. Enable DHCP Option 2 from DHCP Option 2 in the local server automatically. The default setting If set to "Yes", the UCM6200 is allowed to get provisioned for Time Zone is "Yes". Enable DHCP Option 42 from DHCP Option 42 in the local server automatically. This will override If set to "Yes", the UCM6200 is allowed to get provisioned for NTP Server the manually configured NTP Server. The default setting is "Yes". Time Zone Select the proper time zone option so the UCM6200 can display correct time accordingly. If "Self-Defined Tome Zone" is selected, please specify the time zone parameters in "Self-Defined Time Zone" field as described in below option. If "Self-Defined Time Zone" is selected in "Time Zone" option, users will need define their own time zone following the format below. The syntax is: std offset dst [offset], start [/time], end [/time]
Default is set to: MTZ+6MDT+5,M4.1.0,M11.1.0 MTZ+6MDT+5 Self-Defined Time Zone This indicates a time zone with 6 hours offset and 1 hour ahead for DST, which is U.S central time. If it is positive (+), the local time zone is west of the Prime Meridian (A.K.A: International or Greenwich Meridian); If it is negative (-), the local time zone is east. M4.1.0,M11.1.0 The 1st number indicates Month: 1,2,3.., 12 (for Jan, Feb, .., Dec). The 2nd number indicates the nth iteration of the weekday: (1st Sunday, 3rd Tuesday). Normally 1, 2, 3, 4 are used. If 5 is used, it means the last iteration of the weekday. The 3rd number indicates weekday: 0,1,2,..,6 (
for Sun, Mon, Tues, ... ,Sat). Therefore, this example is the DST which starts from the First Sunday of April to the 1st Sunday of November. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 75 of 321 SET TIME MANUALLY To manually set the time on the UCM6200, go to Web UI->Settings->Time Settings->Set Time Manually. The format is YYYY-MM-DD HH:MI:SS. Figure 48: Set Time Manually
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note:
Manually setup time will take effect immediately after saving and applying change in the web UI. If users would like to reboot the UCM6200 and keep the manually setup time setting, please make sure "Remote NTP Server", "Enable DHCP Option 2" and "Enable DHCP Option 42" options under Web GUI->Settings->Time Settings->Time Auto Updating page are unchecked or set to empty. Otherwise, time auto updating settings in this page will take effect after reboot.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
OFFICE TIME On the UCM6200, the system administrator can define "office time", which can be used to configure time condition for extension call forwarding schedule and inbound rule schedule. To configure office time, go to Web UI->Settings->Time Settings->Office Time. Click on "Create New Office Time" to create an office time. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 76 of 321 Start Time End Time Week Show Advanced Options Month Day Figure 49: Create New Office Time Table 22: Create New Office Time Configure the start time for office hour. Configure the end time for office hour Select the work days in one week. Check this options to show advanced options. Once selected, please specify "Month" and "Day" below. Select the months for office time. Select the work days in one month. Select "Start Time", "End Time" and the day for the "Week" for the office time. The system administrator can also define month and day of the month as advanced options. Once done, click on "Save" and then
"Apply Change" for the office time to take effect. The office time will be listed in the web page as the figure shows below. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 77 of 321 Figure 50: Settings->Time Settings->Office Time Click on to edit the office time. Click on to delete the office time. Click on "Delete Selected Office Times" to delete multiple selected office times at once. HOLIDAY On the UCM6200, the system administrator can define "holiday", which can be used to configure time condition for extension call forwarding schedule and inbound rule schedule. To configure holiday, go to Web UI->Settings->Time Settings->Holiday. Click on "Create New Holiday" to create holiday time. Figure 51: Create New Holiday Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 78 of 321 Name Specify the holiday name to identify this holiday. Table 23: Create New Holiday Holiday Memo Create a note for the holiday. Month Day Select the month for the holiday. Select the day for the holiday. Show Advanced Options Week Check this option to show advanced options. If selected, please specify the days as holiday in one week below. Select the days as holiday in one week. Enter holiday "Name" and "Holiday Memo" for the new holiday. Then select "Month" and "Day". The system administrator can also define days in one week as advanced options. Once done, click on "Save"
and then "Apply Change" for the holiday to take effect. The holiday will be listed in the web page as the figure shows below. Figure 52: Settings->Time Settings->Holiday Click on to edit the holiday. Click on to delete the holiday. Click on "Delete Selected Holidays" to delete multiple selected holidays at once.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Note:
For more details on how to use office time and holiday, please refer to the link below:
http://www.grandstream.com/sites/default/files/Resources/How_to_use_office_time_and_holiday_UCM62 00.pdf
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 79 of 321 NTP SERVER The UCM6200 can be used as a NTP server for the NTP clients to synchronize their time with. To configure the UCM6200 as the NTP server, set "Enable NTP server"
to "Yes" under web GUI->Settings->NTP Server. On the client side, point the NTP server address to the UCM6200 IP address or host name to use the UCM6200 as the NTP server. RECORDINGS STORAGE The UCM6200 supports call recordings automatically or manually and the recording files can be saved in external storage plugged in the UCM6200 or on the UCM6200 locally. To manage the recording storage, users can go to UCM6200 web GUI->Settings->Recordings Storage page and select whether to store the recording files in USB Disk, SD card or locally on the UCM6200. Figure 53: Settings->Recordings Storage If Enable Auto Change is selected, the recording files will be automatically saved in the available USB Disk or SD card plugged into the UCM6200. If both USB Disk and SD card are plugged in, the recording files will be always saved in the USB Disk. If Local is selected, the recordings will be stored in UCM6200 internal storage. If USB Disk or SD Card is selected, the recordings will be stored in the corresponding plugged in external storage device. Please note the options USB Disk and SD Card will be displayed only if they are plugged into the UCM6200. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 80 of 321 Once USB Disk or SD Card is selected, click on OK. The user will be prompted to confirm to copy the local files to the external storage device. Figure 54: Recordings Storage Prompt Information Click on OK to continue. The users will be prompted a new dialog to select the categories for the files to be copied over. Figure 55: Recording Storage Category On the UCM6200, recording files are generated and exist in 3 categories: normal call recording files, conference recording files, and call queue recording files. Therefore users have the following options when select the categories to copy the files to the external device:
- Recording Files: Copy the normal recording files to the external device.
- Conference: Copy the conference recording files to the external device.
- Queue: Copy the call queue recording files to the external device.
- All: Copy all recording files to the external device. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 81 of 321 LOGIN TIMEOUT SETTINGS After the user logs in the UCM6200 web UI, the user will be automatically logged out after certain timeout. This timeout value can be specified under UCM100 web GUI->Settings->Login Timeout Settings page. The User Login Timeout value is in minute and the default setting is 10 minutes. If the user doesnt make any operation on web UI within the timeout, the user will be logged out automatically. After that, the web UI will be redirected to the login page and the user will need to enter username and password to log in. If set to 0, there is no timeout for the web UI login session and the user will not be automatically logged out. Figure 56: Login Timeout Settings Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 82 of 321 GOOGLE SERVICE SETTINGS SUPPORT UCM6200 now supports Google OAuth 2.0 authentication. This feature is used for supporting UCM6200 conference scheduling system. Once OAuth 2.0 is enabled, UCM6200 conference system can access Google calendar to schedule or update conference. Google Service Settings can be found under web GUI-> Settings-> Google Service Settings-> Google Service Settings. Figure 57: Google Service Settings->OAuth2.0 Authentication If you already have OAuth2.0 project set up on Google Developers web page, please use your existing login credential for OAuth2.0 Client ID and OAuth2.0 Client Secret in the above figure for the UCM6200 to access Google Service. If you do not have OAuth2.0 project set up yet, please following the steps below to create new project and obtain credentials:
1. Go to Google Developers page https://console.developers.google.com/start Create a New Project in Google Developers page. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 83 of 321 Figure 58: Google Service->New Project 2. Enable Calendar API from API Library. 3. Click Credentials on the left drop down menu to create new OAuth2.0 login credentials. Figure 59: Google Service->Create New Credential 4. Use the newly created login credential to fill in OAuth2.0 Client ID and OAuth2.0 Client Secret. 5. Click Get Authentication Code to obtain authentication code from Google Service. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 84 of 321 Figure 60: Google Service->OAuth2.0 Login 6. Now UCM6200 is connected with Google Service. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 85 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 86 of 321 PROVISIONING OVERVIEW Grandstream SIP Devices can be configured via Web interface as well as via configuration file through TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS download. All Grandstream SIP devices support a proprietary binary format configuration file and XML format configuration file. The UCM6200 provides a Plug and Play mechanism to auto-provision the Grandstream SIP devices in a zero configuration manner by generating XML config file and having the phone to download it within LAN area. This allows users to finish the installation with ease and start using the SIP devices in a managed way. To provision a phone, three steps are involved, i.e., discovery, configuration and provisioning. This section explains how Zero Config works on the UCM6200. The settings for this feature can be accessed via Web UI->PBX->Zero Config. CONFIGURATION ARCHITECTURE FOR END POINT DEVICE Started from firmware version 1.0.7.10, the end point device configuration in zero config is divided into the following three layers with priority from the lowest to the highest:
Global This is the lowest layer. Users can configure the most basic options that could apply to all Grandstream SIP devices during provisioning via Zero config. Model In this layer, users can define model-specific options for the configuration template. Device This is the highest layer. Users can configure device-specific options for the configuration for individual device here. Each layer also has its own structure in different levels. Please see figure below. The details for each layer are explained in sections
[GLOBAL CONFIGURATION], [MODEL CONFIGURATION] and [DEVICE CONFIGURATION]. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 87 of 321 Figure 61: Zero Config Configuration Architecture for End Point Device The configuration options in model layer and device layer have all the option in global layers already, i.e., the options in global layer is a subset of the options in model layer and device layer. If an option is set in all three layers with different values, the highest layer value will override the value in lower layer. For example, if the user selects English for Language setting in Global Policy and Spanish for Language setting in Default Model Template, the language setting on the device to be provisioned will use Spanish as model layer has higher priority than global layer. To sum up, configurations in higher layer will always override the configurations for the same options/fields in the lower layer when presented at the same time. After understanding the zero config configuration architecture, users could configure the available options for end point devices to be provisioned by the UCM6200 by going through the three layers. This configuration architecture allows users to set up and manage the Grandstream end point devices in the same LAN area in a centralized way. AUTO PROVISIONING SETTINGS By default, the Zero Config feature is enabled on the UCM6200 for auto provisioning. Three methods of auto provisioning are used. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 88 of 321 Figure 62: UCM6200 Zero Config SIP SUBSCRIBE When the phone boots up, it sends out SUBSCRIBE to a multicast IP address in the LAN. The UCM6200 discovers it and then sends a NOTIFY with the XML config file URL in the message body. The phone will then use the path to download the config file generated in the UCM6200 and take the new configuration. DHCP OPTION 66 This method should be used on the UCM6202/UCM6204 because only the UCM6202/UCM6204 have WAN and LAN port with LAN port supporting the router function. When the phone restarts (by default DHCP Option 66 is turned on), it will send out a DHCP DISCOVER request. The UCM6202 receives it and returns DHCP OFFER with the config server path URL in Option 66, for example, https://192.168.2.1:8089/zccgi/. The phone will then use the path to download the config file generated in the UCM6200. mDNS Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 89 of 321 When the phone boots up, it sends out mDNS query to get the TFTP server address. The UCM6200 will respond with its own address. The phone will then send TFTP request to download the XML config file from the UCM6200. To start the auto provisioning process, under Web GUI->PBX->Zero Config->Zero Config Settings, fill in the auto provision information. Figure 63: Auto Provision Settings Table 24: Auto Provision Settings Enable Zero Config Enable or disable the zero config feature on the PBX. The default setting is enabled. By default, this is disabled. If disabled, when SIP device boots up, the UCM6200 will not send the SIP device the URL to download the config file and therefore the SIP device will not be automatically provisioned by the Enable Automatic Configuration Assignment UCM6200. Note:
When disabled, SIP devices can still be provisioned by manually sending NOTIFY from the UCM6200 which will include the XML config file URL for the SIP device to download. Automatically Assign Extension If enabled, when the device is discovered, the PBX will automatically assign an extension within the range defined in "Zero Config Extension Segment" to the device. The default setting is disabled. Zero Config Extension Click on the link "Zero Config Extension Segment" to specify the Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 90 of 321 Segment extension range to be assigned if "Automatically Assign Extension" is Enable Pick Extension enabled. The default range is 5000-6299. Zero Config Extension Segment range can be defined in web UI->PBX->Internal Options->General page->Extension Preference section: "Auto Provision Extensions". If enabled, the extension list will be sent out to the device after receiving the device's request. This feature is for the GXP series phones that support selecting extension to be provisioned via phone's LCD. The default setting is disabled. Click on the link "Pick Extension Segment" to specify the extension list to be sent to the device. The default range is 4000 to 4999. Pick Extension Pick Extension Segment Segment range can be defined in web UI->PBX->Internal Options->General page->Extension Preference section:
"Pick Extensions". Pick Extension Period Specify the number of minutes to allow the phones being provisioned to
(hour):
pick extensions. Please make sure an extension is manually assigned to the phone or "Automatically Assign Extension" is enabled during provisioning. After the configuration on the UCM6200 web GUI, click on "Save" and "Apply Changes". Once the phone boots up and picks up the config file from the UCM6200, it will take the configuration right away. DISCOVERY Users could manually discover the device by specifying the IP address or scanning the entire LAN network. Three methods are supported to scan the devices. PING ARP SIP Message (NOTIFY) Click on "Auto Discover" under web UI-> PBX-> Zero Config->Zero Config, fill in the "Scan Method" and
"Scan IP". The IP address segment will be automatically filled in based on the network mask detected on the UCM6200. If users need scan the entire network segment, enter 255 (for example, 192.168.40.255) instead of a specific IP address. Then click on "Save" to start discovering the devices within the same network. To successfully discover the devices, "Zero Config" needs to be enabled on the UCM6200 web GUI->PBX->Zero Config->Auto Provisioning Settings. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 91 of 321 Figure 64: Auto Discover The following figure shows a list of discovered phones. The MAC address, IP Address, Extension (if assigned), Version, Vendor, Model, Connection Status, Create Config, Options (Edit/Delete/Update) are displayed in the list. Figure 65: Discovered Devices GLOBAL CONFIGURATION GLOBAL POLICY Global configuration will apply to all the connected Grandstream SIP end point devices in the same LAN with the UCM6200 no matter what the Grandstream device model it is. It is divided into two levels:
Web UI->PBX->Zero Config->Global Policy Web UI->PBX->Zero Config->Global Templates. Global Templates configuration has higher priority to Global Policy configuration. Global Policy can be accessed in web GUI->PBX->Zero Config->Global Policy page. On the top of the configuration table, users can select category in the "Options" dropdown list to quickly navigate to the category. The categories are:
Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 92 of 321 Localization: configure display language, data and time. Phone Settings: configure dial plan, call features, NAT, call progress tones and etc. Contact List: configure LDAP and XML phonebook download. Maintenance: configure upgrading, web access, Telnet/SSH access and syslog. Network Settings: configure IP address, QoS and STUN settings. Customization: customize LCD screen wallpaper for the supported models. Select the checkbox on the left of the parameter you would like to configure to active the dropdown list for this parameter. Figure 66: Global Policy Categories The following tables list the Global Policy configuration parameters for the SIP end device. Language settings Language Date and Time Date Format Time Format NTP Server Table 25: Global Policy Parameters->Localization Select the LCD display language on the SIP end device. Configure the date display format on the SIP end devices LCD. Configure the time display in 12-hour or 24-hour format on the SIP end devices LCD. Configure the URL or IP address of the NTP server. The SIP end device may obtain the date and time from the server. Time Zone Configure the time zone used on the SIP end device. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 93 of 321 Default Call Settings Dial Plan Table 26: Global Policy Parameters->Phone Settings Configure the default dial plan rule. For syntax and examples, please refer to user manual of the SIP devices to be provisioned for more details. When enabled, Do Not Disturb, Call Forward and other call features Enable Call Features can be used via the local feature code on the phone. Otherwise, the ITSP feature code will be used. Use # as Dial Key If set to Yes, pressing the number key # will immediately dial out the input digits. Auto Answer by Call-info If set to "Yes", the phone will automatically turn on the speaker phone to answer incoming calls after a short reminding beep, based on the SIP Call-Info header sent from the server/proxy. The default setting is enabled. Configure which NAT traversal mechanism will be enabled on the endpoint device. If set to "STUN" and STUN server is configured, the phone system will periodically send STUN message to the SUTN server to get the public IP address of its NAT environment and keep the NAT port open. STUN will not work if the NAT is symmetric type. If set to Keep-alive, the phone system will send the STUN packets to maintain the connection that is first established during registration of the NAT Traversal phone. The Keep-alive packets will fool the NAT device into keeping the connection open and this allows the host server to send SIP requests directly to the registered phone. If it needs to use OpenVPN to connect host server, it needs to set it to VPN. If the firewall and the SIP device behind the firewall are both able to use UPNP, it can be set to UPNP. The both parties will negotiate to use which port to allow SIP through. The default setting is "Keep-alive". Configure whether to allow the endpoint device to use random ports for both SIP and RTP messages. This is usually necessary when multiple phones are behind the same full cone NAT. The default setting is "No". Note: This parameter must be set to "No" for Direct IP Calling to work. Configure call progress tones including ring tone, dial tone, second dial tone, message waiting tone, ring back tone, call waiting tone, busy tone and reorder tone using the following syntax:
f1=val, f2=val[, c=on1/ off1[- on2/ off2[- on3/ off3]]];
Use Random Port General Settings Call Progress Tones Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 94 of 321 Frequencies are in Hz and cadence on and off are in 10ms). on is the period (in ms) of ringing while off is the period of silence. Up to three cadences are supported. Please refer to user manual of the SIP devices to be provisioned for more details HEADSET Key Mode Please refer to user manual of the SIP devices to be provisioned for more Select Default Mode or Toggle Headset/Speaker for the Headset key. LDAP Phonebook details. Table 27: Global Policy Parameters->Contact List Source to the SIP end device. Select "Manual" or "PBX" as the LDAP configuration source. If "Manual" is selected, the LDAP configuration below will be applied Address Port Base DN User Name Password Number Filter Name Filter Version Name Attribute If "PBX" is selected, the LDAP configuration built-in from UCM6200 web UI->Settings->LDAP Server will be applied. Configure the IP address or DNS name of the LDAP server. Configure the LDAP server port. The default value is 389. This is the location in the directory where the search is requested to begin. Example:
dc=grandstream, dc=com ou=Boston, dc=grandstream, dc=com Configure the bind "Username" for querying LDAP servers. The field can be left blank if the LDAP server allows anonymous binds. Configure the bind "Password" for querying LDAP servers. The field can be left blank if the LDAP server allows anonymous binds. Configure the filter used for number lookups. Please refer to user manual for more details. Configure the filter used for name lookups. Please refer to user manual for more details. Select the protocol version for the phone to send the bind requests. The default value is 3. Specify the "name" attributes of each record which are returned in the LDAP search result. Example:
gn cn sn description Number Attribute Specify the "number" attributes of each record which are returned in the Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 95 of 321 LDAP search result. Example:
telephoneNumber telephoneNumber Mobile Configure the entry information to be shown on phone's LCD. Up to 3 Display Name fields can be displayed. Example:
%cn %sn %telephoneNumber Max Hits Specify the maximum number of results to be returned by the LDAP server. Valid range is 1 to 3000. The default value is 50. Specify the interval (in seconds) for the server to process the request and Search Timeout client waits for server to return. Valid range is 0 to 180. The default value Sort Results Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls Lookup Display Name XML Phonebook is 30. Specify whether the searching result is sorted or not. The default setting is No. Configure to enable LDAP number searching when receiving calls. The default setting is No. Configure to enable LDAP number searching when making calls. The default setting is No. Configures the display name when LDAP looks up the name for incoming call or outgoing call. It must be a subset of the LDAP Name Attributes. Select the source of the phonebook XML server. Disable Disable phonebook XML downloading. Manual Phonebook XML Server XML file. The server path could be IP address or URL, with up to 256 Once selected, users need specify downloading protocol HTTP, HTTPS or TFTP and the server path to download the phonebook characters. Local UCM Server Once selected, click on the Server Path field to upload the phonebook XML file. Please note: after uploading the phonebook XML file to the server, the original file name will be used as the directory name and the file will be renamed as phonebook.xml under that directory. Phonebook Download Configure the phonebook download interval (in Minute). If set to 0, Interval automatic download will be disabled. Valid range is 5 to 720. Remove manually-edited If set to "Yes", when XML phonebook is downloaded, the entries added entries on download manually will be automatically removed. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 96 of 321 Upgrade and Provision Table 28: Global Policy Parameters->Maintenance Firmware source via ZeroConfig provisioning could a URL for external server address, local UCM directory or USB media if plugged in to the UCM6200. Select a source to get the firmware file:
URL If select to use URL to upgrade, complete the configuration for the following four parameters: Upgrade Via, Server Path, File Prefix and File Postfix. Local UCM Server Firmware can be uploaded to the UCM6200 internal storage for firmware upgrade. If selected, click on Manage Storage icon next to Directory option, upload firmware file and select directory for the end device to retrieve the firmware file. Local USB Media If selected, the USB storage device needs to be plugged into the UCM6200 and the firmware file must be put under a folder named ZC_firmware in the USB storage root directory. Local SD Card Media If selected, an SD card needs to be plugged into the UCM6200 and the firmware file must be put under a folder named ZC_firmware in the USB storage root directory. When URL is selected as firmware source, configure upgrade via TFTP, HTTP or HTTPS. When URL is selected as firmware source, configure the firmware upgrading server path. When URL is selected as firmware source, configure the firmware file prefix. If configured, only the firmware with the matching encrypted prefix will be downloaded and flashed into the phone, if URL is selected as firmware source. Firmware Source Upgrade via Server Path File Prefix File Postfix postfix. If configured, only the configuration file with the matching When URL is selected as firmware source, configure the firmware file Allow DHCP Option 43/66 encrypted postfix will be downloaded and flashed into the phone. If DHCP option 43 or 66 is enabled on the LAN side, the TFTP server can be redirected. Automatic Upgrade firmware is detected. Users can select automatic upgrading by day, by If enabled, the endpoint device will automatically upgrade if a new week or by minute. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 97 of 321 By week Once selected, specify the day of the week to check HTTP/TFTP server for firmware upgrades or configuration files changes. By day Once selected, specify the hour of the day to check the HTTP/TFTP server for firmware upgrades or configuration files changes. By minute Once selected, specify the interval X that the SIP end device will request for new firmware every X minutes. Firmware Upgrade Rule Specify how firmware upgrading and provisioning request to be sent. Web Access Admin Password Configure the administrator password for admin level login. End-User Password Configure the end-user password for the end user level login. Web Access Mode Select HTTP or HTTPS as the web access protocol. Web Server Port Configure the port for web access. The valid range is 1 to 65535. Security Disable Telnet/SSH Syslog Syslog Server Syslog Level Send SIP Log Basic Settings IP Address Advanced Setting Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 Enable Telnet/SSH access for the SIP end device. If the SIP end device supports Telnet access, this option controls the Telnet access of the device; if the SIP end device supports SSH access, this option controls the SSH access of the device. Configure the URL/IP address for the syslog server. Select the level of logging for syslog. Configure whether the SIP log will be included in the syslog message. Table 29: Global Policy Parameters->Network Settings Configure how the SIP end device shall obtain the IP address. DHCP or PPPoE can be selected. DHCP Once selected, users can specify the Host Name (option 12) of the SIP end device as DHCP client, and Vendor Class ID (option 60) used by the client and server to exchange vendor class ID information. PPPoE Once selected, users need specify the Account ID, Password and Service Name for PPPoE. UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 98 of 321 Layer 3 QoS Define the Layer 3 QoS parameter. This value is used for IP Precedence, Diff-Serv or MPLS. Valid range is 0-63. Layer 2 QoS Tag Assign the VLAN Tag of the Layer 2 QoS packets. Valid range is 0 -4095. Layer 2 QoS Priority Value Assign the priority value of the Layer 2 QoS packets. Valid range is 0-7. STUN Server Configure the IP address or Domain name of the STUN server. Only non-symmetric NAT routers work with STUN. Specify how often the phone will send a blank UDP packet to the SIP Keep Alive Interval server in order to keep the "ping hole" on the NAT router to open. Valid Wallpaper range is 10-160. Table 30: Global Policy Parameters->Customization Check this option if the SIP end device shall use 1024 x 600 resolution for the LCD screen wallpaper. Source Screen Resolution 1024 x Configure the location where wallpapers are stored. 600 File If "URL" is selected as source, specify the URL of the wallpaper file. If
"Local UCM Server" is selected as source, click to upload wallpaper file to the UCM6200. Check this option if the SIP end device shall use 800 x 400 resolution for the LCD screen wallpaper. Source Screen Resolution 800 x 400 Configure the location where wallpapers are stored. File If "URL" is selected as source, specify the URL of the wallpaper file. If
"Local UCM Server" is selected as source, click to upload wallpaper file to the UCM6200. Check this option if the SIP end device shall use 480 x 272 resolution for the LCD screen wallpaper. Source Screen Resolution 480 x 272 Configure the location where wallpapers are stored. File If "URL" is selected as source, specify the URL of the wallpaper file. If
"Local UCM Server" is selected as source, click to upload wallpaper file to the UCM6200. Check this option if the SIP end device supports 320 x 240 resolution for Screen Resolution 320 x 240 the LCD screen wallpaper. Source Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 99 of 321 Configure the location where wallpapers are stored. File If "URL" is selected as source, specify the URL of the wallpaper file. If
"Local UCM Server" is selected as source, click to upload wallpaper file to the UCM6200. GLOBAL TEMPLATES Global Templates can be accessed in web GUI->PBX->Zero Config->Global Templates. Users can create multiple global templates with different sets of configurations and save the templates. Later on, when the user configures the device in Edit Device dialog->Advanced Settings, the user can select to use one of the global template for the device. Please refer to section [MANAGE DEVICES] for more details on using the global templates. When creating global template, users can select the categories and the parameters under each category to be used in the template. The global policy and the selected global template will both take effect when generating the config file. However, the selected global template has higher priority to the global policy when it comes to the same setting option/field. If the same option/field has different value configured in the global policy and the selected global template, the value for this option/field in the selected global template will override the value in global policy. Click on "Create New Template" to add a global template. Users will see the following configurations. Table 31: Create New Template Template Name Create a name to identify this global template. Description Provide a description for the global template. This is optional. Active Check this option to enable the global template. Click on to edit the global template. The window for editing global template is shown in the following figure. In the Options field, after entering the option name key word, the options containing the key word will be listed. Users could then select the options to be modified and click on Add Option to add it into the global template. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 100 of 321 Figure 67: Edit Global Template The added options will show in the list. Users can then enter or select value for each option to be used in the global template. On the left side of each added option, users can click on to remove this option from the template. On the right side of each option, users can click on value to the default value. to reset the option Click on Save to save this global template. The created global templates will show in the web UI->PBX->Zero Config->Global Templates page. Users can click on to delete the global template or click on Delete Selected Templates to delete multiple selected templates at once. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 101 of 321 Click on Toggle Selected Template(s) to toggle the status between enabled/disabled for the selected templates. MODEL CONFIGURATION MODEL TEMPLATES Model layer configuration allows users to apply model-specific configurations to different devices. Users could create/edit/delete a model template by accessing web GUI, page PBX->Zero Config->Model Templates. If multiple model templates are created and enabled, when the user configures the device in Edit Device dialog->Advanced Settings, the user can select to use one of the model template for the device. Please refer to section [MANAGE DEVICES] for more details on using the model template. For each created model template, users can assign it as default model template. If assigned as default model template, the values in this model template will be applied to all the devices of this model. There is always only one default model template that can be assigned at one time on the UCM6200. The selected model template and the default model template will both take effect when generating the config file for the device. However, the model template has higher priority to default model template when it comes to the same setting option/field. If the same option/field has different value configured in the default model template and the selected model template, the value for this option/field in the selected model template will override the value in default model template. Click on Create New Template to add a model template. Model Table 32: Create New Model Template Select a model to apply this template. The supported Grandstream models are listed in the dropdown list for selection. Template Name Create a name for the model template. Description Enter a description for the model template. This is optional. Default Model Template value of the option in default model template will be overridden if other Select to assign this model template as the default model template. The Active selected model template has a different value for the same option. Check this option to enable the model template. Click on to edit the model template. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 102 of 321 The editing window for model template is shown in the following figure. In the Options field, enter the option name key word, the option that contains the key word will be listed. User could then select the option and click on Add Option to add it into the model template. Once added, the option will be shown in the list below. On the left side of each option, users can click to remove this option from the model template. On the right side of each option, users can click to reset the option to the default value. on on User could also click on Add New Field to add a P value number and the value to the configuration. The following figure shows setting P value P1362 to en, which means the display language on the LCD is set to English. For P value information of different models, please refer to configuration template here http://www.grandstream.com/support/tools. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 Figure 68: Edit Model Template UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 103 of 321 Click on Save when done. The model template will be displayed on web UI->PBX->Zero Config->Model Templates page. Click on to delete the model template or click on Delete Selected Templates to delete multiple selected templates at once. Click on Toggle Selected Template(s) to toggle the status between enabled/disabled for the selected model templates. MODEL UPDATE UCM6200 zero config feature supports provisioning all models of Grandstream SIP end devices. Templates for most of the Grandstream models are built in with the UCM6200 already. Templates for GS Wave and Grandstream surveillance products require users to download and install under web UI->PBX->Zero Config->Model Update first before they are available in the UCM6200 for selection. After downloading and installing the model template to the UCM6200, it will show in the dropdown list for Model selection when editing the model template. Click on to download the template. Click on to upgrade the model template. Users will see this icon available if the device model has template updated in the UCM6200. Figure 69: Template Management In case the UCM6200 is placed in the private network and Internet access is restricted, users will not be able to get packages by downloading and installing from the remote server. Model template package can be manually uploaded from local device through web UI. Please contact Grandstream customer support if the model package is needed for manual uploading. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 104 of 321 Figure 70: Upload Model Template Manually DEVICE CONFIGURATION On web GUI, page PBX->Zero Config->Zero Config, users could create new device, delete existing device(s), make special configuration for a single device, or send NOTIFY to existing device(s). CREATE NEW DEVICE Besides configuring the device after the device is discovered, users could also directly create a new device and configure basic settings before the device is discovered by the UCM6200. Once the device is plugged in, it can then be discovered and provisioned. This gives the system administrator adequate time to set up each device beforehand. Click on "Create New Device" and the following dialog will show. Follow the steps below to create the configurations for the new device. 1. Firstly, select a model for the device to be created and enter its MAC address, IP address and firmware version (optional) in the corresponding field. 2. Basic settings will show a list of settings based on the model selected in step 1. Users could assign extensions to accounts, assign functions to Line Keys and Multiple-Purposed Keys if supported on the selected model. 3. Click on Create New Device to save the configuration for this device. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 105 of 321 Figure 71: Create New Device MANAGE DEVICES The device manually created or discovered from Auto Discover will be listed in the web UI->PBX->Zero Config->Zero Config page. Users can see the devices with their MAC address, IP address, vendor, model and etc. Figure 72: Manage Devices Click on to access the web UI of the phone. Click on to edit the device configuration. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 106 of 321 A new dialog will be displayed for the users to configure Basic settings and Advanced settings. Basic settings have the same configurations as displayed when manually creating a new device, i.e., account, line key and MPK settings; Advanced settings allow users to configure more details in a five-level structure. Figure 73: Edit Device A preview of the Advanced settings is shown in the above figure. There are five levels configurations as described in (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) below, with priority from the lowest to the highest. The configurations in all levels will take effect for the device. If there are same options existing in different level configurations with different value configured, the higher level configuration will override the lower level configuration.
(1) Global Policy This is the lowest level configuration. The global policy configured in web UI->PBX->Zero Config->Global Policy will be applied here. Clicking on Modify Global Policy to redirect to page PBX->Zero Config->Global Policy. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 107 of 321
(2) Global Templates Select a global template to be used for the device and click on to add. Multiple global templates can be selected and users can arrange the priority by adjusting orders via and
. All the selected global templates will take effect. If the same option exists on multiple selected global templates, the value in the template with higher priority will override the one in the template with lower priority. Click on to remove the global template from the selected list.
(3) Default Model Template Default Model Template will be applied to the devices of this model. Default model template can be configured in model template under web UI->PBX->Zero Config->Model Templates page. Please see default model template option in [Table 32: Create New Model Template].
(4) Model Templates Select a model template to be used for the device and click on to add. Multiple global templates can be selected and users can arrange the priority by adjusting orders via and
. All the selected model templates will take effect. If the same option exists on multiple selected model templates, the value in the template with higher priority will override the one in the template with lower priority. Click on to remove the model template from the selected list.
(5) Customize Device Settings This is the highest level configuration for the device. Click on Modify Customize Device Settings and following dialog will show. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 108 of 321 Figure 74: Edit Customize Device Settings Scroll down in the dialog to view and edit the device-specific options. If the users would like to add more options which are not in the pre-defined list, click on Add New Field to add a P value number and the value to the configuration. The following figure shows setting P value P1362 to en, which means the display language on the LCD is set to English. The warning information on right tells that the option matching the P value number exists and clicking on it will lead to the matching option. For P value information of different models, please refer to configuration template here http://www.grandstream.com/sites/default/files/Resources/config-template.zip. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 109 of 321 to Figure 75: Add P Value in Customize Device Settings Select multiple devices that need to be modified and then click on batch modify devices. If selected devices are of the same model, the configuration dialog is like the following figure. Configurations in five levels are all available for users to modify. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 110 of 321 Figure 76: Modify Selected Devices - Same Model If selected devices are of different models, the configuration dialog is like the following figure. Click on to view more devices of other models. Users are only allowed to make modifications in Global Templates and Global Policy level. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 111 of 321 Figure 77: Modify Selected Devices - Different Models
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note:
Performing batch operation will override all the existing device configuration on the page.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
After the above configurations, save the changes and go back to web UI->PBX->Zero Config->Zero Config page. Users could then click on to send NOTIFY to the SIP end point device and trigger the provisioning process. The device will start downloading the generated configuration file from the URL contained in the NOTIFY message. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 112 of 321 Figure 78: Device List in Zero Config In this web page, users can also click on Reset All Extensions to reset the extensions of all the devices. SAMPLE APPLICATION Assuming in a small business office where there are 8 GXP2140 phones used by customer support and 1 GXV3275 phone used by customer support supervisor. 3 of the 8 customer support members speak Spanish and the rest speak English. We could deploy the following configurations to provisioning the office phones for the customer support team. 1. Go to web GUI->PBX->Zero Config->Zero Config Settings, select Enable Zero Config. 2. Go to web GUI->PBX->Zero Config->Global Policy, configure Date Format, Time Format and Firmware Source as follows. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 113 of 321 Figure 79: Zero Config Sample - Global Policy 3. Go to web GUI->PBX->Zero Config->Model Templates, create a new model template English Support Template for GXP2140. Add option Language and set it to English. Then select the option Default Model Template to make it the default model template. 4. Go to web GUI->PBX->Zero Config->Model Templates, create another model template Spanish Support Template for GXP2140. Add option Language and set it to Espaol. 5. After 9 devices are powered up and connected to the LAN network, use Auto Discover function or Create New Device function to add the devices to the device list on web UI->PBX->Zero Config->Zero Config. 6. On web GUI->PBX->Zero Config->Zero Config page, users could identify the devices by their MAC addresses or IP addresses displayed on the list. Click on to edit the device settings. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 114 of 321 7. For each of the 5 phones used by English speaking customer support, in Basic settings select an available extension for account 1 and click on Save. Then click on Advanced settings tab to bring up the following dialog. Users will see the English support template is applied since this is the default model template. A preview of the device settings will be listed on the right side. Figure 80: Zero Config Sample - Device Preview 1 8. For the 3 phones used by Spanish support, in Basic settings select an available extension for account 1 and click on Save. Then click on Advanced settings tab to bring up the following dialog. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 115 of 321 Figure 81: Zero Config Sample - Device Preview 2 Select Spanish Support Template in 4 Model Template. The preview of the device settings is displayed on the right side and we can see the language is set to Espaol since Model Template has the higher priority for the option Language, which overrides the value configured in default model template. 9. For the GXV3275 used by the customer support supervisor, select an available extension for account 1 on Basic settings and click on Save. Users can see the preview of the device configuration in Advanced settings. There is no model template configured for GXV3275. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 116 of 321 10. Click on Apply Changes to apply saved changes. Figure 82: Zero Config Sample - Device Preview 3 11. On the web UI->PBX->Zero Config->Zero Config page, click on to send NOTIFY to trigger the device to download config file from UCM6200. Now all the 9 phones in the network will be provisioned with an unique extension registered on the UCM6200. 3 of the phones will be provisioned to display Spanish on LCD and the other 5 will be provisioned to display English on LCD. The GXV3275 used by the supervisor will be provisioned to use the default language on LCD display since its not specified in the global policy. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 117 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 118 of 321 EXTENSIONS CREATE NEW USER CREATE NEW SIP EXTENSION To manually create new SIP user, go to Web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Extensions. Click on
"Create New User"->"Create New SIP Extension" and a new dialog window will show for users to fill in the extension information. Figure 83: Create New Device SIP extension options are divided into four categories:
Basic Settings Media Features Specific Time Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 119 of 321 Click on the tag to view or edit options belonging to that category. The configuration parameters are as follows. General Extension Table 33: SIP Extension Configuration Parameters->Basic Settings The extension number associated with the user. Configure the CallerID Number that would be applied for outbound calls CallerID Number Note:
from this user. Permission The ability to manipulate your outbound Caller ID may be limited by your VoIP provider. Assign permission level to the user. The available permissions are
"Internal", "Local", "National" and "International" from the lowest level to the highest level. The default setting is "Internal". Note:
Users need to have the same level as or higher level than an outbound rule's privilege in order to make outbound calls using this rule. Configure the password for the user. A random secure password will be SIP/IAX Password automatically generated. It is recommended to use this password for security purpose. Auth ID Configure the authentication ID for the user. If not configured, the extension number will be used for authentication. Enable Voicemail Enable voicemail for the user. The default setting is "Yes". Voicemail Password Skip Voicemail Password Verification Configure voicemail password (digits only) for the user to access the voicemail box. A random numeric password is automatically generated. It is recommended to use the random generated password for security purpose. When user dials voicemail code, the password verification IVR is skipped. If enabled, this would allow one-button voicemail access. By default this option is disabled. If selected, this extension will be disabled on the UCM6200. Disable This Extension Note:
User Settings First Name Last Name The disabled extension still exists on the PBX but cant be used on the end device. Configure the first name of the user. The first name can contain characters, letters, digits and _. Configure the last name of the user. The last name can contain Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 120 of 321 Email Address characters, letters, digits and _. Fill in the Email address for the user. Voicemail will be sent to this Email address. User Password password is automatically generated. It is recommended to use the Configure the password for user portal access. A random numeric randomly generated password for security purpose. Select the voice prompt language to be used for this extension. The default setting is "Default" which is the selected voice prompt language under web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Language. The dropdown list Language shows all the current available voice prompt languages on the UCM6200. To add more languages in the list, please download voice prompt package by selecting "Check Prompt List" under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Language. Concurrent Registrations The maximum endpoints which can be registered into this extension. For security concerns, the default value is 1. SIP Settings NAT Table 34: SIP Extension Configuration Parameters->Media Use NAT when the UCM6200 is on a public IP communicating with devices hidden behind NAT (e.g., broadband router). If there is one-way audio issue, usually it's related to NAT configuration or Firewall's support of SIP and RTP ports. The default setting is enabled. By default, the UCM6200 will route the media steams from SIP endpoints through itself. If enabled, the PBX will attempt to negotiate with the Can Direct Media endpoints to route the media stream directly. It is not always possible for the UCM6200 to negotiate endpoint-to-endpoint media routing. The default setting is "No". Select DTMF mode for the user to send DTMF. The default setting is
"RFC2833". If "Info" is selected, SIP INFO message will be used. If DTMF Mode
"Inband" is selected, 64-kbit PCMU and PCMA are required. When "Auto"
is selected, RFC2833 will be used if offered, otherwise "Inband" will be used. If the phone has an assigned PSTN telephone number, this field should be set to User=Phone. User=Phone parameter will be attached to the TEL URI Request-Line and TO header in the SIP request to indicate the E.164 number. If set to Enable, Tel will be used instead of SIP in the SIP request. Enable Keep-alive If enabled, empty SDP packet will be sent to the SIP server periodically to keep the NAT port open. The default setting is "Yes". Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 121 of 321 Keep-alive Frequency Configure the Keep-alive interval (in seconds) to check if the host is up. The default setting is 60 seconds. Enable T.38 UDPTL Enable or disable T.38 UDPTL support. SRTP Enable SRTP for the call. The default setting is disabled. Select Fax mode. The default setting is None. None: Disable Fax. Fax Mode detected and the received Fax will be sent to the Email address Fax Detect: Fax signal from the user/trunk during the call can be Strategy configured for this extension. If no Email address can be found for the user, the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Fax/T.38. This option controls how the extension can be used on devices within different types of network. Allow All Device in any network can register this extension. Local Subnet Only Only the user in specific subnet can register this extension. Up to three subnet addresses can be specified. A Specific IP Address Only the device on the specific IP address can register this extension. The default setting is "Allow All". Select audio and video codec for the extension. The available codecs are:
Codec Preference PCMU, PCMA, GSM, AAL2-G.726-32, G,726, G.722, G.729, G.723, iLBC, ADPCM, H.264, H.263, H.263p and VP8. Call Transfer Table 35: SIP Extension Configuration Parameters->Features Call Forward Unconditional configured, the Call Forward Unconditional feature is deactivated. The Configure the Call Forward Unconditional target number. If not default setting is deactivated. Select time condition for Call Forward Unconditional. CFU takes effect only during the selected time condition. The available time condition are Office Time, Out of Office Time, Holiday, Out of Holiday, Out of Office Time or Holiday and Specific. CFU Time Condition Note:
Specific has higher priority to Office Times if there is a conflict in terms of time period. Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 122 of 321 time. Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings->Time Settings->Office Time/Holiday page. Configure the Call Forward No Answer target number. If not configured, Call Forward No Answer the Call Forward No Answer feature is deactivated. The default setting is deactivated. Select time condition for Call Forward No Answer. The available time condition are Office Time, Out of Office Time, Holiday, Out of Holiday, Out of Office Time or Holiday and Specific. Note:
Specific has higher priority to Office Times if there is a conflict in CFN Time Condition terms of time period. Call Forward Busy Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time. Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings->Time Settings->Office Time/Holiday page. Configure the Call Forward Busy target number. If not configured, the Call Forward Busy feature is deactivated. The default setting is deactivated. Select time condition for Call Forward Busy. The available time condition are Office Time, Out of Office Time, Holiday, Out of Holiday, Out of Office Time or Holiday and Specific. Note:
Specific has higher priority to Office Times if there is a conflict in CFB Time Condition terms of time period. Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time. Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings->Time Settings->Office Time/Holiday page. CC Settings Enable CC party is available, given that a previous call to that party failed for some If enabled, UCM6200 will automatically alert this extension when a called CC Mode reason. By default its disabled. Two modes for Call Completion are supported:
Normal: This extension is used as ordinary extension. For Trunk: This extension is registered from a PBX. The default setting is Normal. CC Max Agents Configure the maximum number of CCSS agents which may be allocated Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 123 of 321 for this channel. In other words, this number serves as the maximum number of CC requests this channel is allowed to make. The minimum value is 1. Configure the maximum number of monitor structures which may be created for this device. In other words, this number tells how many callers may request CC services for a specific device at one time. The minimum value is 1. Enable this option to have an external number ring simultaneously along with the extension. If a register trunk is used for outbound, the register number will be used to be displayed for the external number as caller ID number. CC Max Monitors Ring Simultaneously Ring Simultaneously External Number Set the external number to be rang simultaneously. - is the connection character which will be ignored. Time Condition for Ring Ring the external number simultaneously along with the extension on the Simultaneously basis of this time condition. Other Settings Configure the number of seconds to ring the user before the call is forwarded to voicemail (voicemail is enabled) or hang up (voicemail is disabled). If not specified, the default ring timeout is 60 seconds on the UCM6200, which can be configured in the global ring timeout setting Ring Timeout under web GUI->Internal Options->IVR Prompt: General Preference. The valid range is between 5 seconds and 600 seconds. Note:
If the end point also has a ring timeout configured, the actual ring timeout used is the shortest time set by either device. Enable automatic recording for the calls using this extension. The default Auto Record setting is disabled. The recording files can be accessed under web Skip Trunk Auth GUI->CDR->Recording Files. If set to yes, users can skip entering the password when making outbound calls. If set to By Time, users can skip entering the password when making outbound calls during the selected time condition. If set to No, users will be asked to enter the password when making outbound calls. Time Condition for Skip If Skip Trunk Auth is set to By Time, select a time condition during which Trunk Auth users can skip entering password when making outbound calls. Dial Trunk Password Configure personal password when making outbound calls via trunk. Support Hot-Desking Mode If enabled, SIP Password will accept only alphabet characters and digits. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 124 of 321 Auth ID will be changed to the same as Extension. Enable LDAP If enabled, the extension will be added to LDAP Phonebook PBX list. Enable WebRTC Support Enable registration and call from WebRTC. Music On Hold Specify which Music On Hold class to suggest to the bridged channel when putting them on hold. Call Duration Limit The maximum duration of call-blocking. Specific Time Time Condition Table 36: SIP Extension Configuration Parameters->Specific Time Click to add Time Condition to configure specific time for this extension. CREATE NEW IAX EXTENSION The UCM6200 supports Inter-Asterisk eXchange (IAX) protocol. IAX is used for transporting VoIP telephony sessions between servers and terminal devices. IAX is similar to SIP but also has its own characteristic. For more information, please refer to RFC 5465. To manually create new IAX user, go to Web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Extensions. Click on
"Create New User"->"Create New IAX Extension" and a new dialog window will show for users to fill in the extension information. The configuration parameters are as follows. General Extension Table 37: IAX Extension Configuration Parameters->Basic Settings The extension number associated with the user. Configure the CallerID Number that would be applied for outbound calls CallerID Number Note:
from this user. Permission The ability to manipulate your outbound Caller ID may be limited by your VoIP provider. Assign permission level to the user. The available permissions are
"Internal", "Local", "National" and "International" from the lowest level to the highest level. The default setting is "Internal". Note:
Users need to have the same level as or higher level than an outbound rule's privilege in order to make outbound calls using this rule. Configure the password for the user. A random secure password will be SIP/IAX Password automatically generated. It is recommended to use this password for security purpose. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 125 of 321 Enable Voicemail Enable voicemail for the user. The default setting is "Yes". Voicemail Password Skip Voicemail Password Verification Configure voicemail password (digits only) for the user to access the voicemail box. A random numeric password is automatically generated. It is recommended to use the random generated password for security purpose. When user dials voicemail code, the password verification IVR is skipped. If enabled, this would allow one-button voicemail access. By default this option is disabled. If selected, this extension will be disabled on the UCM6200. Disable This Extension Note:
User Settings First Name Last Name Email Address The disabled extension still exists on the PBX but cant be used on the end device. Configure the first name of the user. The first name can contain characters, letters, digits and _. Configure the last name of the user. The last name can contain characters, letters, digits and _. Fill in the Email address for the user. Voicemail will be sent to this Email address. User Password password is automatically generated. It is recommended to use the Configure the password for user portal access. A random numeric randomly generated password for security purpose. Select the voice prompt language to be used for this extension. The default setting is "Default" which is the selected voice prompt language under web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Language. The dropdown list Language shows all the current available voice prompt languages on the UCM6200. To add more languages in the list, please download voice prompt package by selecting "Check Prompt List" under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Language. SIP Settings Max Number of Calls Require Call Token Table 38: IAX Extension Configuration Parameters->Media Configure the maximum number of calls allowed for each remote IP address. Configure to enable/disable requiring call token. If set to "Auto", it might lock out users who depend on backward compatibility when peer authentication credentials are shared between physical endpoints. The default setting is "Yes". Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 126 of 321 SRTP Enable SRTP for the call. The default setting is disabled. Select Fax Mode. The default setting is None. None: Disable Fax. This is the default setting. Fax Mode detected and the received Fax will be sent to the Email address Fax Detect: Fax signal from the user/trunk during the call can be Strategy configured for this extension. If no Email address can be found for the user, the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Fax/T.38. This option controls how the extension can be used on devices within different types of network. Allow All Device in any network can register this extension. Local Subnet Only Only the user in specific subnet can register this extension. Up to three subnet addresses can be specified. A Specific IP Address Only the device on the specific IP address can register this extension. The default setting is "Allow All". Codec Preference PCMU, PCMA, GSM, AAL2-G.726-32, G,726, G.722, G.729, G.723, iLBC, Select audio and video codec for the extension. The available codecs are:
ADPCM, H.264, H.263, H.263p and VP8. Table 39: IAX Extension Configuration Parameters->Features Call Transfer Call Forward Unconditional configured, the Call Forward Unconditional feature is deactivated. The Configure the Call Forward Unconditional target number. If not default setting is deactivated. Select time condition for Call Forward Unconditional. CFU takes effect only during the selected time condition. The available time condition are Office Time, Out of Office Time, Holiday, Out of Holiday, Out of Office Time or Holiday and Specific. Note:
CFU Time Condition Specific has higher priority to Office Times if there is a conflict in terms of time period. Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time. Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings->Time Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 127 of 321 Call Forward No Answer the Call Forward No Answer feature is deactivated. The default setting is Configure the Call Forward No Answer target number. If not configured, Settings->Office Time/Holiday page. deactivated. Select time condition for Call Forward No Answer. The available time condition are Office Time, Out of Office Time, Holiday, Out of Holiday, Out of Office Time or Holiday and Specific. Note:
Specific has higher priority to Office Times if there is a conflict in CFN Time Condition terms of time period. Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time. Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings->Time Settings->Office Time/Holiday page. Call Forward Busy Configure the Call Forward Busy target number. If not configured, the Call Forward Busy feature is deactivated. The default setting is deactivated. Select time condition for Call Forward Busy. The available time condition are Office Time, Out of Office Time, Holiday, Out of Holiday, Out of Office Time or Holiday and Specific. Note:
Specific has higher priority to Office Times if there is a conflict in CFB Time Condition terms of time period. Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time. Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings->Time Settings->Office Time/Holiday page. Enable this option to have an external number ring simultaneously along with the extension. If a register trunk is used for outbound, the register number will be used to be displayed for the external number as caller ID number. Ring Simultaneously Ring Simultaneously External Number Set the external number to be rang simultaneously. - is the connection character which will be ignored. Time Condition for Ring Ring the external number simultaneously along with the extension on the Simultaneously basis of this time condition. Other Settings Ring Timeout Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 Configure the number of seconds to ring the user before the call is UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 128 of 321 forwarded to voicemail (voicemail is enabled) or hang up (voicemail is disabled). If not specified, the default ring timeout is 60 seconds on the UCM6200, which can be configured in the global ring timeout setting under web GUI->Internal Options->IVR Prompt: General Preference. The valid range is between 5 seconds and 600 seconds. Note:
If the end point also has a ring timeout configured, the actual ring timeout used is the shortest time set by either device. Enable automatic recording for the calls using this extension. The default Auto Record setting is disabled. The recording files can be accessed under web Skip Trunk Auth GUI->CDR->Recording Files. If set to Yes, users can skip entering the password when making outbound calls. If set to By Time, users can skip entering the password when making outbound calls during the selected time condition. If set to No, users will be asked to enter the password when making outbound calls. Time Condition for Skip If Skip Trunk Auth is set to By Time, select a time condition during Trunk Auth which users can skip entering password when making outbound calls. Dial Trunk Password Configure personal password when making outbound calls via trunk. Enable LDAP If enabled, the extension will be added to LDAP Phonebook PBX lists. Music On Hold Configure the Music On Hold class to suggest to the bridged channel when putting them on hold. Call Duration Limit The maximum duration of call-blocking. Table 40: IAX Extension Configuration Parameters->Specific Time Click to add Time Condition to configure specific time for this extension. Specific Time Time Condition CREATE NEW FXS EXTENSION The UCM6200 supports Foreign eXchange Subscriber (FXS) interface. FXS is used when user needs to connect analog phone lines or FAX machines to the UCM6200. To manually create new FXS user, go to Web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Extensions. Click on
"Create New User"->"Create New FXS Extension" and a new dialog window will show for users to fill in the extension information. The configuration parameters are as follows. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 129 of 321 Table 41: FXS Extension Configuration Parameters->Basic Settings General Extension The extension number associated with the user. Analog Station Select the FXS port to be assigned for this extension. Configure the CallerID Number that would be applied for outbound calls CallerID Number Note:
from this user. Permission The ability to manipulate your outbound Caller ID may be limited by your VoIP provider. Assign permission level to the user. The available permissions are
"Internal", "Local", "National" and "International" from the lowest level to the highest level. The default setting is "Internal". Note:
Users need to have the same level as or higher level than an outbound rule's privilege in order to make outbound calls using this rule. Enable Voicemail Enable voicemail for the user. The default setting is "Yes". Voicemail Password Skip Voicemail Password Verification Configure voicemail password (digits only) for the user to access the voicemail box. A random numeric password is automatically generated. It is recommended to use the random generated password for security purpose. When user dials voicemail code, the password verification IVR is skipped. If enabled, this would allow one-button voicemail access. By default this option is disabled. If selected, this extension will be disabled on the UCM6200. Disable This Extension Note:
User Settings First Name Last Name Email Address The disabled extension still exists on the PBX but cant be used on the end device. Configure the first name of the user. The first name can contain characters, letters, digits and _. Configure the last name of the user. The last name can contain characters, letters, digits and _. Fill in the Email address for the user. Voicemail will be sent to this Email address. User Password password is automatically generated. It is recommended to use the Configure the password for user portal access. A random numeric randomly generated password for security purpose. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 130 of 321 Select the voice prompt language to be used for this extension. The default setting is "Default" which is the selected voice prompt language under web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Language. The dropdown list Language shows all the current available voice prompt languages on the UCM6200. To add more languages in the list, please download voice prompt package by selecting "Check Prompt List" under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Language. Analog Settings Call Waiting User # as SEND RX Gain TX Gain Table 42: FXS Extension Configuration Parameters->Media Configure to enable/disable call waiting feature. The default setting is
"No". If configured, the # key can be used as SNED key after dialing the number on the analog phone. The default setting is "Yes". Configure the RX gain for the receiving channel of analog FXS port. The valid range is -30dB to +6dB. The default setting is 0. Configure the TX gain for the transmitting channel of analog FXS port. The valid range is -30dB to +6dB. The default setting is 0. Configure the minimum period of time (in milliseconds) that the hook-flash MIN RX Flash must remain unpressed for the PBX to consider the event as a valid flash MAX RX Flash event. The valid range is 30ms to 1000ms. The default setting is 200ms. Configure the maximum period of time (in milliseconds) that the hook-flash must remain unpressed for the PBX to consider the event as a valid flash event. The minimum period of time is 256ms and it can't be modified. The default setting is 1250ms. If enabled, a polarity reversal will be marked as received when an outgoing call is answered by the remote party. For some countries, a Enable Polarity Reversal polarity reversal is used for signaling the disconnection of a phone line and the call will be considered as hangup on a polarity reversal. The default setting is "Yes". Specify "ON", "OFF" or a value (the power of 2) from 32 to 1024 as the number of taps of cancellation. Note:
When configuring the number of taps, the number 256 is not translated into 256ms of echo cancellation. Instead, 256 taps means 256/8 = 32 ms. The default setting is "ON", which is 128 taps. Configure to enable/disable 3-way calling feature on the user. The default setting is enabled. Echo Cancellation 3-Way Calling Send CallerID After Configure the number of rings before sending CID. Default setting is 1. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 131 of 321 For FXS extension, there are three options available in Fax Mode. The default setting is None. None: Disable Fax. Fax Mode configured for this extension. If no Email address can be found for the Fax Detect: Fax signal from the user/trunk during the call can be detected and the received Fax will be sent to the Email address user, the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Fax/T.38. Fax Gateway: If selected, the UCM6200 can support conversation and processing of Fax data from T.30 to T.38 or T.38 to T.30. This feature is only available for FXS or FXO port. Table 43: FXS Extension Configuration Parameters->Features Call Transfer Call Forward Unconditional configured, the Call Forward Unconditional feature is deactivated. The Configure the Call Forward Unconditional target number. If not CFU Time Condition default setting is deactivated. Select time condition for Call Forward Unconditional. CFU takes effect only during the selected time condition. The available time condition are Office Time, Out of Office Time, Holiday, Out of Holiday, Out of Office Time or Holiday and Specific. Note:
Specific has higher priority to Office Times if there is a conflict in terms of time period. Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time. Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings->Time Settings->Office Time/Holiday page. Configure the Call Forward No Answer target number. If not configured, Call Forward No Answer the Call Forward No Answer feature is deactivated. The default setting is CFN Time Condition deactivated. Select time condition for Call Forward No Answer. The available time condition are Office Time, Out of Office Time, Holiday, Out of Holiday, Out of Office Time or Holiday and Specific. Note:
Specific has higher priority to Office Times if there is a conflict in terms of time period. Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 132 of 321 Call Forward Busy time. Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings->Time Settings->Office Time/Holiday page. Configure the Call Forward Busy target number. If not configured, the Call Forward Busy feature is deactivated. The default setting is deactivated. Select time condition for Call Forward Busy. The available time condition are Office Time, Out of Office Time, Holiday, Out of Holiday, Out of Office Time or Holiday and Specific. Note:
Specific has higher priority to Office Times if there is a conflict in CFB Time Condition terms of time period. Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog. Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time. Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings->Time Settings->Office Time/Holiday page. CC Settings Enable CC party is available, given that a previous call to that party failed for some If enabled, UCM6200 will automatically alert this extension when a called reason. Ring Simultaneously Ring Simultaneously External Number Enable this option to have an external number ring simultaneously along with the extension. If a register trunk is used for outbound, the register number will be used to be displayed for the external number as caller ID number. Set the external number to be rang simultaneously. - is the connection character which will be ignored. Time Condition for Ring Ring the external number simultaneously along with the extension on the Simultaneously basis of this time condition. Hotline Enable Hotline If enabled, hotline dialing plan will be activated, a pre-configured number will be used according to the selected Hotline Type. Hotline Number Configure the Hotline Number Configure the Hotline Type:
Hotline Type immediately dial the preset number Immediate Hotline: When the phone is off-hook, UCM6200 will Delay Hotline: When the phone is off-hook, if there is no dialing within 5 seconds, UCM6200 will dial the preset number. Other Settings Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 133 of 321 Configure the number of seconds to ring the user before the call is forwarded to voicemail (voicemail is enabled) or hang up (voicemail is disabled). If not specified, the default ring timeout is 60 seconds on the UCM6200, which can be configured in the global ring timeout setting Ring Timeout under web GUI->Internal Options->IVR Prompt: General Preference. The valid range is between 5 seconds and 600 seconds. Note:
If the end point also has a ring timeout configured, the actual ring timeout used is the shortest time set by either device. Enable automatic recording for the calls using this extension. The default Auto Record setting is disabled. The recording files can be accessed under web Skip Trunk Auth GUI->CDR->Recording Files. If set to Yes, users can skip entering the password when making outbound calls. If set to By Time, users can skip entering the password when making outbound calls during the selected time condition. If set to No, users will be asked to enter the password when making outbound calls. Time Condition for Skip If Skip Trunk Auth is set to By Time, select a time condition during Trunk Auth which users can skip entering password when making outbound calls. Dial Trunk Password Configure personal password when making outbound calls via trunk. Enable LDAP Music On Hold If enabled, this extension will be added to LDAP Phonebook PBX list; if disabled, this extension will be skipped when creating LDAP Phonebook. Select which Music On Hold class to suggest to extension when putting the active call on hold. Call Duration Limit Configure the maximum duration of call-blocking. Table 44: FXS Extension Configuration Parameters->Specific Time Click to add Time Condition to configure specific time for this extension. Specific Time Time Condition BATCH ADD EXTENSIONS BATCH ADD SIP EXTENSIONS In order to add multiple SIP extensions, BATCH add can be used to create standardized SIP extension accounts. However, unique extension user name cant be set using BATCH add. Under Web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Extensions, click on "Batch Add Extensions"->"Batch Add SIP Extensions". Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 134 of 321 Table 45: Batch Add SIP Extension Parameters General Start Extension Configure the starting extension number of the batch of extensions to be added. Create Number Specify the number of extensions to be added. The default setting is 5. Permission Assign permission level to the user. The available permissions are
"Internal", "Local", "National" and "International" from the lowest level to the highest level. The default setting is "Internal". Note:
Users need to have the same level as or higher level than an outbound rule's privilege in order to make outbound calls from this rule. Enable Voicemail Enable Voicemail for the user. The default setting is "Yes". Configure the SIP/IAX password for the users. Three options are available to create password for the batch of extensions. User Random Password. SIP/IAX Password A random secure password will be automatically generated. It is recommended to use this password for security purpose. Use Extension as Password. Enter a password to be used on all the extensions in the batch. Configure Voicemail password (digits only) for the users. User Random Password. Voicemail Password A random password in digits will be automatically generated. It is recommended to use this password for security purpose. Use Extension as Password. Enter a password to be used on all the extensions in the batch. Configure the number of seconds to ring the user before the call is forwarded to voicemail (voicemail is enabled) or hang up (voicemail is disabled). If not specified, the default ring timeout is 60 seconds on the UCM6200, which can be configured in the global ring timeout setting Ring Timeout under web GUI->Internal Options->IVR Prompt: General Preference. The valid range is between 5 seconds and 600 seconds. Note:
If the end point also has a ring timeout configured, the actual ring timeout used is the shortest time set by either device. Enable automatic recording for the calls using this extension. The default Auto Record setting is disabled. The recording files can be accessed under web GUI->CDR->Recording Files. Skip Voicemail Password When user dials voicemail code, the password verification IVR is skipped. Verification If enabled, this would allow one-button voicemail access. By default this Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 135 of 321 option is disabled. Music On Hold Select which Music On Hold class to suggest to extensions when putting them on hold. Enable LDAP PBX list; if disabled, the batch added extensions will be skipped when If enabled, the batch added extensions will be added to LDAP Phonebook creating LDAP Phonebook. Enable WebRTC Support If enabled, extensions will be able to login to user portal and use Web RTC features. Call Duration Limit Configure the maximum duration of call-blocking. SIP Settings NAT Use NAT when the PBX is on a public IP communicating with devices hidden behind NAT (e.g., broadband router). If there is one-way audio issue, usually it's related to NAT configuration or Firewall's support of SIP and RTP ports. The default setting is enabled. By default, the PBX will route the media steams from SIP endpoints through itself. If enabled, the PBX will attempt to negotiate with the Can Direct Media endpoints to route the media stream directly. It is not always possible for the PBX to negotiate endpoint-to-endpoint media routing. The default setting is "No". Select DTMF mode for the user to send DTMF. The default setting is
"RFC2833". If "Info" is selected, SIP INFO message will be used. If DTMF Mode
"Inband" is selected, 64-kbit codec PCMU and PCMA are required. When
"Auto" is selected, RFC2833 will be used if offered, otherwise "Inband"
Enable Keep-alive Keep-alive Frequency will be used. If enabled, empty SDP packet will be sent to the SIP server periodically to keep the NAT port open. The default setting is "Yes". Configure the number of seconds for the host to be up for Keep-alive. The default setting is 60 seconds. If the end device/phone has an assigned PSTN telephone number, this field should be set to "User=Phone". Then a "User=Phone" parameter will TEL URI be attached to the Request-Line and TO header in the SIP request to Concurrent Registrations Other Settings SRTP Fax Mode indicate the E.164 number. If set to "Enable", "Tel:" will be used instead of
"SIP:" in the SIP request. The default setting is disabled. The maximum endpoints which can be registered into this extension. For security concerns, the default value is 1. Enable SRTP for the call. The default setting is "No". Select Fax mode for this user. The default setting is None. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 136 of 321 None: Disable Fax. Fax Detect: Fax signal from the user/trunk during the call can be detected and the received Fax will be sent to the Email address configured for this extension. If no Email address can be found for the user, the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Fax/T.38. This option controls how the extension can be used on devices within different types of network. Allow All Device in any network can register this extension. Local Subnet Only Only the user in specific subnet can register this extension. Up to three subnet addresses can be specified. A Specific IP Address. Only the device on the specific IP address can register this extension. The default setting is "Allow All". Strategy Enable T.38 UDPTL Enable or disable T.38 UDPTL Support. Skip Trunk Auth outbound call. If enable Follow Me, the user can dial out via follow me If enable All, users do not need to enter password when making an without password. Codec Preference PCMU, PCMA, GSM, AAL2-G.726-32, G.722, G.729, G.723, Ilbc, ADPCM, Select audio and video codec for the extension. The available codecs are:
LPC10, H.264, H.263, H.263p and VP8. BATCH ADD IAX EXTENSIONS Under Web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Extensions, click on Batch Add Extensions->Batch Add IAX Extensions. General Start Extension Table 46: Batch Add IAX Extension Parameters Configure the starting extension number of the batch of extensions to be added. Create Number Specify the number of extensions to be added. The default setting is 5. Permission Assign permission level to the user. The available permissions are Internal, Local, National and International from the lowest level to the highest level. The default setting is Internal. Note:
Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 137 of 321 Users need to have the same level as or higher level than an outbound rules privilege in order to make outbound calls from this rule. Enable Voicemail Enable Voicemail for the user. The default setting is Yes. Configure the SIP/IAX password for the users. Three options are available to create password for the batch of extensions. User Random Password. SIP/IAX Password A random secure password will be automatically generated. It is recommended to use this password for security purpose. Use Extension as Password. Enter a password to be used on all the extensions in the batch. Configure Voicemail password (digits only) for the users. User Random Password. Voicemail Password A random password in digits will be automatically generated. It is recommended to use this password for security purpose. Use Extension as Password. Enter a password to be used on all the extensions in the batch. Configure the number of seconds to ring the user before the call is forwarded to voicemail (voicemail is enabled) or hang up (voicemail is disabled). If not specified, the default ring timeout is 60 seconds on the UCM6200, which can be configured in the global ring timeout setting Ring Timeout under web GUI->Internal Options->IVR Prompt: General Preference. The valid range is between 5 seconds and 600 seconds. Note:
If the end point also has a ring timeout configured, the actual ring timeout used is the shortest time set by either device. Enable automatic recording for the calls using this extension. The default Auto Record setting is disabled. The recording files can be accessed under web GUI->CDR->Recording Files. Skip Voicemail Password Verification Music On Hold When user dials voicemail code, the password verification IVR is skipped. If enabled, this would allow one-button voicemail access. By default this option is disabled. Select which Music On Hold class to suggest to extensions when putting them on hold. Enable LDAP PBX list; if disabled, the batch added extensions will be skipped when If enabled, the batch added extensions will be added to LDAP Phonebook Call Duration Limit Configure the maximum duration of call-blocking. creating LDAP Phonebook. IAX Settings Max Number of Calls Configure the maximum number of calls allowed for each remote IP Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 138 of 321 Require Call Token Other Settings SRTP address. Configure to enable/disable requiring call token. If set to "Auto", it might lock out users who depend on backward compatibility when peer authentication credentials are shared between physical endpoints. The default setting is "Yes". Enable SRTP for the call. The default setting is "No". Select Fax Mode for this user. The default setting is None. None: Disable Fax. Fax Mode detected and the received Fax will be sent to the Email address Fax Detect: Fax signal from the user/trunk during the call can be Strategy configured for this extension. If no Email address can be found for the user, the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Fax/T.38. This option controls how the extension can be used on devices within different types of network. Allow All Device in any network can register this extension. Local Subnet Only Only the user in specific subnet can register this extension. Up to three subnet addresses can be specified. A Specific IP Address. Only the device on the specific IP address can register this extension. The default setting is "Allow All". If enable All, users do not need to enter password when making an Skip Trunk Auth outbound call. If enable Follow Me, the call can dial out via follow me without password. Codec Preference PCMU, PCMA, GSM, AAL2-G.726-32, G.722, G.729, G.723, iLBC, Select audio and video codec for the extension. The available codecs are:
ADPCM, LPC10, H.264, H.263, H.263p and VP8. SEARCH AND EDIT EXTENSION All the UCM6200 extensions are listed under Web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Extensions, with status, Extension, CallerID Name, Technology (SIP, IAX and FXS), IP and Port. Each extension has a checkbox for users to "Modify Selected Extensions" or "Delete Selected Extensions". Also, options
"Edit
, "Reboot"
and "Delete"
are available per extension. User can search an extension by specifying the extension number to find an extension quickly. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 139 of 321 Status Figure 84: Manage Extensions Users can see the following icon for each extension to indicate the SIP status. Green:
Free Blue:
Ringing Yellow:
In Use Grey:
Unavailable (the extension is not registered or disabled on the PBX) Edit single extension Click on to start editing the extension parameters. Reboot the user Click on to send NOTIFY reboot event to the device which has an UCM6200 extension already registered. To successfully reboot the user, "Zero Config" needs to be enabled on the UCM6200 web GUI->PBX->Zero Config->Auto Provisioning Settings. Delete single extension Click on to delete the extension. Or select the checkbox of the extension and then click on "Delete Selected Extensions". Modify selected extensions Select the checkbox for the extension(s). Then click on "Modify Selected Extensions" to edit the extensions in a batch. Delete selected extensions Select the checkbox for the extension(s). Then click on "Delete Selected Extensions" to delete the extension(s). Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 140 of 321 EXPORT EXTENSIONS The extensions configured on the UCM6200 can be exported to csv format file with selected technology
"SIP", "IAX" or "FXS". Click on "Export Extensions" button and select technology in the prompt below. Figure 85: Export Extensions The exported csv file can be serve as a template for users to fill in desired extension information to be imported to the UCM6200. IMPORT EXTENSIONS The capability to import extensions to the UCM6200 provides users flexibility to batch add extensions with similar or different configuration quickly into the PBX system. 1. Export extension csv file from the UCM6200 by clicking on "Export Extensions" button. 2. Fill up the extension information you would like in the exported csv template. 3. Click on "Import Extensions" button. The following dialog will be prompted. Figure 86: Import Extensions 4. Select the option in "On Duplicate Extension" to define how the duplicate extension(s) in the imported csv file should be treated by the PBX. Skip: Duplicate extensions in the csv file will be skipped. The PBX will keep the current extension Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 141 of 321 information as previously configured without change. Delete and Recreate: The current extension previously configured will be deleted and the duplicate extension in the csv file will be loaded to the PBX. Update Information: The current extension previously configured in the PBX will be kept. However, if the duplicate extension in the csv file has different configuration for any options, it will override the configuration for those options in the extension. 5. Click on to select csv file from local directory in the PC. 6. Click on "Save" to import the csv file. 7. Click on "Apply Changes" to apply the imported file on the UCM6200. EMAIL TO USER Once the extensions are created with Email address, the PBX administrator can click on button Email To User to send the account registration and configuration information to the user. Please make sure Email setting under web UI->Settings->Email Settings is properly configured and tested on the UCM6200 before using Email To User. When click on Email To User button, the following message will be prompted in the web page. Click on OK to confirm sending the account information to all users Email addresses. Figure 87: Email To User - Prompt Information The user will receive Email including account registration information and LDAP configuration. A QR code is also generated for Mobile applications to scan it and get automatically provisioned. QR code provisioning is supported on Grandstream Softphone GS Wave AndroidTM application and iOS application. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 142 of 321 Figure 88: Account Registration Information and QR Code Figure 89: LDAP Client Information and QR Code Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 143 of 321 MULTIPLE REGISTRATIONS PER EXTENSION UCM6200 supports multiple registrations per extension so that users can use the same extension on devices in different locations. Figure 90: Multiple Registrations per Extension This feature can be enabled by configuring option Concurrent Registrations under web UI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Edit Extension. The default value is set to 1 for security purpose. Figure 91: Extension - Concurrent Registration Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 144 of 321 SMS MESSAGE SUPPORT The UCM6200 provides built-in SIP SMS message support. For SIP end devices such as Grandstream GXP or GXV phones that supports SIP message, after an UCM6200 account is registered on the end device, the user can send and receive SMS message. Please refer to the end device documentation on how to send and receive SMS message. SMS Message support is a new feature added since firmware 1.0.10.x. Figure 92: SMS Message Support Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 145 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 146 of 321 TRUNKS ANALOG TRUNKS Go to Web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Analog Trunks to add and edit analog trunks. Click on "Create New Analog Trunk" to add a new analog trunk. Click on to edit the analog trunk. Click on to delete the analog trunk. ANALOG TRUNK CONFIGURATION The analog trunk options are listed in the table below. Channels Trunk Name Table 47: Analog Trunk Configuration Parameters Select the channel for the analog trunk. UCM6202: 2 channels UCM6204: 4 channels UCM6208: 8 channels Specify a unique label to identify the trunk when listed in outbound rules, incoming rules and etc. Enable this option to satisfy two primary use cases, which include SLA Mode emulating a simple key system and creating shared extensions on a PBX. Enable SLA Mode will disable polarity reversal. The barge option specifies whether or not other stations are allowed to Barge Allowed join a call in progress on this trunk. If enabled, the other stations can Hold Access Advanced Options Enable Polarity Reversal press the line button to join the call. The default setting is Yes. The hold option specifies hold permissions for this trunk. If set to Open, any station can place this trunk on hold and any other station is allowed to retrieve the call. If set to Private, only the station that places the call on hold can retrieve the call. The default setting is Yes. If enabled, a polarity reversal will be marked as received when an outgoing call is answered by the remote party. For some countries, a polarity reversal is used for signaling the disconnection of a phone line and the call will be considered as hangup on a polarity reversal. The Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 147 of 321 Polarity on Answer Delay Current Disconnect Threshold (ms) default setting is No. When FXO port answers the call, FXS may send a Polarity Reversal. If this interval is shorter than the value of Polarity on Answer Delay, the Polarity Reversal will be ignored. Otherwise, the FXO will onhook to disconnect the call. The default setting is 600ms. This is the periodic time (in ms) that the UCM6200 will use to check on a voltage drop in the line. The default setting is 200. The valid range is 50 to 3000. Configure the ring timeout (in ms). Trunk (FXO) devices must have a timeout to determine if there was a hangup before the line is answered. Ring Timeout This value can be used to configure how long it takes before the UCM6200 considers a non-ringing line with hangup activity. The default RX Gain TX Gain setting is 8000. Configure the RX gain for the receiving channel of analog FXO port. The valid range is from -13.5 (dB) to + 12.0 (dB). The default setting is 0. Configure the TX gain for the transmitting channel of analog FXO port. The valid range is from -13.5 (dB) to + 12.0 (dB). The default setting is 0. Use CallerID Configure to enable CallerID detection. The default setting is Yes. Caller ID Scheme FXO Dial Delay(ms) Select the Caller ID scheme for this trunk. The default setting is Bellcore/Telcordia. Configure the time interval between off-hook and first dialed digit for outbound calls. Auto Record setting is disabled. The recording files can be accessed under web Enable automatic recording for the calls using this trunk. The default Disable This Trunk If selected, the trunk will be disabled. GUI->CDR->Recording Files. This is to implement analog trunk outbound line selection strategy. Three options are available:
Ascend When the call goes out from this analog trunk, it will always try to use the first idle FXO port. The port order that the call will use to go out would be port 1->port 2->port 10->port 16. Every time it will start with DAHDI Out Line Selection port 1 (if it's idle). Poll When the call goes out from this analog trunk, it will use the port that is not used last time. And it will always use the port in the order of port 1->2->10->16->1->2->10->16->1->2->10->16..., following the last port being used. Descend Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 148 of 321 When the call goes out from this analog trunk, it will always try to use the last idle FXO port. The port order that the call will use to go out would be port 16->port 10->port 2->port 1. Every time it will start with port 16 (if it's idle). The default setting is Ascend mode. Busy Detection is used to detect far end hangup or for detecting busy signal. The default setting is "Yes". If "Busy Detection" is enabled, users can specify the number of busy tones to be played before hanging up. The default setting is 2. Better Tone Settings Busy Detection Busy Tone Count results might be achieved if set to 4, 6 or even 8. Please note that the Congestion Detection Congestion Count higher the number is, the more time is needed to hangup the channel. However, this might lower the probability to get random hangup. Congestion detection is used to detect far end congestion signal. The default setting is "Yes". If "Congestion Detection" is enabled, users can specify the number of congestion tones to wait for. The default setting is 2. Select the country for tone settings. If "Custom" is selected, users could Tone Country manually configure the values for Busy Tone and Congestion Tone. The default setting is "United States of America (USA)". Syntax:
f1=val[@level][,f2=val[@level]],c=on1/off1[-on2/off2[-on3/off3]];
Frequencies are in Hz and cadence on and off are in ms. Busy Tone Frequencies Range: [0, 4000) Busy Level Range: (-300, 0) Cadence Range: [0, 16383]. Select Tone Country "Custom" to manually configure Busy Tone value. Default value:
f1=480@-50,f2=620@-50,c=500/500 Syntax:
f1=val[@level][,f2=val[@level]],c=on1/off1[-on2/off2[-on3/off3]];
Frequencies are in Hz and cadence on and off are in ms. Frequencies Range: [0, 4000) Congestion Tone Busy Level Range: (-300, 0) Cadence Range: [0, 16383]. Select Tone Country "Custom" to manually configure Busy Tone value. Default value:
f1=480@-50,f2=620@-50,c=250/250 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 149 of 321 Click on "Detect" to detect the busy tone, Polarity Reversal and Current Disconnect by PSTN. Before the detecting, please make sure there are more than one channel configured and working properly. If the detection has busy tone, the "Tone Country" option will be set as "Custom". PSTN Detection PSTN DETECTION The UCM6200 provides PSTN detection function to help users detect the busy tone, Polarity Reversal and Current Disconnect by making a call from the PSTN line to another destination. The detecting call will be answered and up for about 1 minute. Once done, the detecting result will show and can be used for the UCM6200 settings. 1. Go to UCM6200 web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Analog Trunks page. 2. Click to edit the analog trunk created for the FXO port. 3. In the dialog window to edit the analog trunk, go to "Tone Settings" section and there are two methods to set the busy tone. Tone Country. The default setting is "United States of America (USA)". PSTN Detection. 4. Click on "Detect" to start PSTN detection. Figure 93: UCM6200 FXO Tone Settings Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 150 of 321 Figure 94: UCM6200 PSTN Detection If there are two FXO ports connected to PSTN lines, use the following settings for auto-detection. Detect Model: Auto Detect. Source Channel: The source channel to be detected. Destination Channel: The channel to help detecting. For example, the second FXO port. Destination Number: The number to be dialed for detecting. This number must be the actual PSTN number for the FXO port used as the destination channel. Figure 95: UCM6200 PSTN Detection: Auto Detect Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 151 of 321 If there is only one FXO port connected to PSTN line, use the following settings for auto-detection. Figure 96: UCM6200 PSTN Detection: Semi-Auto Detect Detect Model: Semi-auto Detect. Source Channel: The source channel to be detected. Destination Number: The number to be dialed for detecting. This number could be a cell phone number or other PSTN number that can be reached from the source channel PSTN number. 5. Click "Detect" to start detecting. The source channel will initiate a call to the destination number. For
"Auto Detect", the call will be automatically answered. For "Semi-auto Detect", the UCM6200 web GUI will display prompt to notify the user to answer or hang up the call to finish the detecting process. 6. Once done, the detected result will show. Users could save the detecting result as the current UCM6200 settings. Detect Model Table 48: PSTN Detection for Analog Trunk Select "Auto Detect" or "Semi-auto Detect" for PSTN detection. Auto Detect Please make sure two or more channels are connected to the UCM6200 and in idle status before starting the detection. During the detection, one channel will be used as caller (Source Channel) and another channel will be used as callee (Destination Channel). The UCM6200 will control the call to be established and hang up between caller and callee to finish the detection. Semi-auto Detect Semi-auto detection requires answering or hanging up the call Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 152 of 321 manually. Please make sure one channel is connected to the UCM6200 and in idle status before starting the detection. During the detection, source channel will be used as caller and send the call to the configured Destination Number. Users will then need follow the prompts in web GUI to help finish the detection. The default setting is "Auto Detect". Source Channel Select the channel to be detected. Destination Channel Select the channel to help detect when "Auto Detect" is used. Destination Number Configure the number to be called to help the detection.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Note:
The PSTN detection process will keep the call up for about 1 minute. If "Semi-auto Detect' is used, please pick up the call only after informed from the web GUI prompt. Once the detection is successful, the detected parameters "Busy Tone", "Polarity Reversal" and
"Current Disconnect by PSTN" will be filled into the corresponding fields in the analog trunk configuration.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
VOIP TRUNKS VoIP trunks can be configured in UCM6200 under Web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->VoIP Trunks. Once created, the VoIP trunks will be listed with Provider Name, Type, Hostname/IP, Username and Options to edit/detect the trunk. Click on "Create New SIP Trunk" or "Create New IAX Trunk" to add a new VoIP trunk. Click on to configure detailed parameters for the VoIP trunk. Click on to configure Direct Outward Dialing (DOD) for the SIP Trunk. Click on to start LDAP Sync. Click on to delete the VoIP trunk. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 153 of 321 For VoIP trunk example, please refer to the document in the following link:
http://www.grandstream.com/sites/default/files/Resources/ucm_to_ucm_peer_guide.pdf The VoIP trunk options are listed in the table below. Type Provider Name Host Name Keep Original CID Keep Trunk CID Table 49: Create New SIP Trunk Select the VoIP trunk type. Peer SIP Trunk Register SIP Trunk Configure a unique label to identify this trunk when listed in outbound rules, inbound rules and etc. Configure the IP address or URL for the VoIP providers server of the trunk. Keep the CID from the inbound call when dialing out. This setting will override Keep Trunk CID option. Please make sure that the peer PBX at the other side supports to match user entry using username field from authentication line. If enabled, the trunk CID will not be overridden by extensions CID when the extension has CID configured. The default setting is No. Turn on this setting when the PBX is using public IP and communicating NAT with devices behind NAT. If there is one-way audio issue, usually it is related to NAT configuration or SIP/RTP port support on the firewall. If checked, the trunk will be disabled. Disable This Trunk Note:
If a current SIP trunk is disabled, UCM will send UNREGISTER message
(REGISTER message with expires=0) to the SIP provider. If the trunk has an assigned PSTN telephone number, this field should be set to "User=Phone". Then a "User=Phone" parameter will be attached to TEL URI the Request-Line and TO header in the SIP request to indicate the E.164 number. If set to "Enable", "Tel:" will be used instead of "SIP:" in the SIP request. The default setting is disabled. Configure the Caller ID. This is the number that the trunk will try to use when making outbound calls. For some providers, it might not be possible to set the CallerID with this option and this option will be ignored. Caller ID When making outgoing calls, the following rules are used to determine which CallerID will be used if they exist:
The CallerID configured for the extension will be looked up first. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 154 of 321 If no CallerID is configured for the extension, the CallerID configured for the trunk will be used. If the above two are missing, the "Global Outbound CID" defined in Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->General will be used. Select whether the trunk needs to register on the external server or not when "Register SIP Trunk" type is selected. The default setting is No. Enter the username to register to the trunk from the provider when
"Register SIP Trunk" type is selected. Enter the password to register to the trunk from the provider when
"Register SIP Trunk" is selected. Enter the Authentication ID for "Register SIP Trunk" type. Enable automatic recording for the calls using this trunk (for SIP trunk Need Registration Username Password Auth ID Auto Record only). The default setting is disabled. The recording files can be accessed Basic Settings Provider Name Host Name under web GUI->CDR->Recording Files. Table 50: SIP Register Trunk Configuration Parameters Configure a unique label to identify this trunk when listed in outbound rules, inbound rules and etc. Configure the IP address or URL for the VoIP providers server of the trunk. Configure the SIP transport protocol to be used in this trunk. The default setting is "All - UDP Primary". UDP Only TCP Only TLS Only Transport All - UDP Primary: UDP is the primary transport protocol when all the other SIP transport methods are available too. All - TCP Primary: TCP is the primary transport protocol when all the other SIP transport methods are available too. All TLS Primary: TLS is the primary transport protocol when all the other SIP transport methods are available too. Keep the CID from the inbound call when dialing out. This setting will override Keep Trunk CID option. Please make sure that the peer PBX at the other side supports to match user entry using username field from authentication line. Keep Original CID Keep Trunk CID If enabled, the trunk CID will not be overridden by extensions CID when the extension has CID configured. The default setting is No. NAT Turn on this option when the PBX is using public IP and communicating Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 155 of 321 with devices behind NAT. If there is one-way audio issue, usually its related to NAT configuration or SIP/RTP port configuration on the firewall. If selected, the trunk will be disabled. Disable This Trunk Note:
If a current SIP trunk is disabled, UCM will send UNREGISTER message
(REGISTER message with expires=0) to the SIP provider. If the trunk has an assigned PSTN telephone number, this field should be set to "User=Phone". Then a "User=Phone" parameter will be attached to TEL URI the Request-Line and TO header in the SIP request to indicate the E.164 Need Registration Username Password Auth ID number. If set to "Enable", "Tel:" will be used instead of "SIP:" in the SIP request. The default setting is disabled. Select whether the trunk needs to register on the external server or not when "Register SIP Trunk" type is selected. The default setting is No. Enter the username to register to the trunk from the provider when
"Register SIP Trunk" type is selected. Enter the password to register to the trunk from the provider when
"Register SIP Trunk" is selected. Enter the Authentication ID for "Register SIP Trunk" type. Enable automatic recording for the calls using this trunk (for SIP trunk Auto Record only). The default setting is disabled. The recording files can be accessed under web GUI->CDR->Recording Files. Advanced Settings Codec Preference are: PCMU, PCMA, GSM, AAL2-G.726-32, G.726, G.722, G.729, G.723, Select audio and video codec for the VoIP trunk. The available codecs From Domain iLBC, ADPCM, H.264, H.263, H.263p and VP8. Configure the actual domain name where the extension comes from. This can be used to override the From Header. For example, "trunk.UCM6200.provider.com" is the From Domain in From Header: sip:1234567@trunk.UCM6200.provider.com. Configure the actual user name of the extension. This can be used to override the From Header. There are cases where there is a single ID for From User registration (single trunk) with multiple DIDs. Send PPI Header For example,
"1234567"
is the From User in From Header:
sip:1234567@trunk.UCM6200.provider.com. If enabled, the SIP INVITE message sent to the trunk will contain PPI
(P-Preferred-Identity) header. The default setting is No. Note:
Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 156 of 321 Send PPI Header and Send PAI Header cannot be enabled at the same time. Only one of the two headers is allowed to be contained in the SIP INVITE message. If enabled, the SIP INVITE message sent to the trunk will contain PAI
(P-Asserted-Identity) header. The default setting is No. Send PAI Header Note:
Send PPI Header and Send PAI Header cannot be enabled at the same time. Only one of the two headers is allowed to be contained in the SIP INVITE message. Outbound Proxy Support Select to enable outbound proxy in this trunk. The default setting is "No". Outbound Proxy DID Mode DTMF Mode Enable Qualify When outbound proxy support is enabled, enter the IP address or URL of the outbound proxy. Configure where to get the destination ID of an incoming SIP call, from SIP Request-line or To-header. The default is set to "Request-line". Configure the default DTMF mode when sending DTMF on this trunk. Default: The global setting of DTMF mode will be used. The global setting for DTMF Mode setting is under web UI->PBX->SIP Settings->ToS. RFC2833: Send DTMF using RFC2833. Info: Send DTMF using SIP INFO message. Inband: Send DTMF using inband audio. This requires 64 bit codec, i.e., PCMU and PCMA. Auto: Send DTMF using RFC2833 if offered. Otherwise, inband will be used. If enabled, the UCM6200 will regularly send SIP OPTIONS to the device to check if the device is still online. The default setting is "No". When "Enable Qualify" option is set to "Yes", configure the timeout (in ms) Qualify Timeout for the Qualify SIP message. If no response is received within the timeout, the device is considered offline. The default setting is 1000ms. When "Enable Qualify" option is set to "Yes", configure the interval (in Qualify Frequency seconds) of the SIP OPTIONS message sent to the device to check if the device is still online. The default setting is 60 seconds. Maximum Number of Call The maximum number of concurrent calls using the trunk. The default Lines settings 0, which means no limit. Fax Mode Select Fax mode. The default setting is None. None: Disable Fax. Fax Detect: Fax signal from the user/trunk during the call can be detected and the received Fax will be sent to the Email address Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 157 of 321 SRTP CC Settings Enable CC CC Max Agents CC Max Monitors Basic Settings Provider Name Host Name configured for this extension. If no Email address can be found for the user, the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Fax/T.38. Enable SRTP for the VoIP trunk. The default setting is "No". If enabled, the system will automatically alert the user when a called party is available, given that a previous call to that party failed for some reason. Configure the maximum number of CCSS agents which may be allocated for this channel. In other words, this number serves as the maximum number of CC requests this channel is allowed to make. The minimum value is 1. Configure the maximum number of monitor structures which may be created for this device. In other words, this number tells how many callers may request CC services for a specific device at one time. The minimum value is 1. Table 51: SIP Peer Trunk Configuration Parameters Configure a unique label to identify this trunk when listed in outbound rules, inbound rules and etc. Configure the IP address or URL for the VoIP providers server of the trunk. Configure the SIP transport protocol to be used in this trunk. The default setting is "All - UDP Primary". UDP Only TCP Only TLS Only Transport All - UDP Primary: UDP is the primary transport protocol when all the other SIP transport methods are available too. All - TCP Primary: TCP is the primary transport protocol when all the other SIP transport methods are available too. All TLS Primary: TLS is the primary transport protocol when all the other SIP transport methods are available too. Keep the CID from the inbound call when dialing out, this setting will override Keep Trunk CID option. Please make sure that the peer PBX at the other side supports to match user entry using username field from authentication line. Keep Original CID Keep Trunk CID If enabled, the trunk CID will not be overridden by extensions CID when the extension has CID configured. The default setting is No. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 158 of 321 NAT awith devices behind NAT. If there is one-way audio issue, usually its related to NAT configuration or SIP/RTP port configuration on the firewall. Turn on this option when the PBX is using public IP and communicating Disable This Trunk Note:
If selected, the trunk will be disabled. If a current SIP trunk is disabled, UCM will send UNREGISTER message
(REGISTER message with expires=0) to the SIP provider. If the trunk has an assigned PSTN telephone number, this field should be set to "User=Phone". Then a "User=Phone" parameter will be attached to TEL URI the Request-Line and TO header in the SIP request to indicate the E.164 number. If set to "Enable", "Tel:" will be used instead of "SIP:" in the SIP request. The default setting is disabled. Configure the Caller ID. This is the number that the trunk will try to use when making outbound calls. For some providers, it might not be possible to set the CallerID with this option and this option will be ignored. When making outgoing calls, the following rules are used to determine which CallerID will be used if they exist:
The CallerID configured for the extension will be looked up first. If no CallerID configured for the extension, the CallerID configured for the trunk will be used. If the above two are missing, the "Global Outbound CID" defined in Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->General will be used. Configure the name of the caller to be displayed when the extension has no CallerID Name configured. Enable automatic recording for the calls using this trunk (for SIP trunk Caller ID CallerID Name Auto Record only). The default setting is disabled. The recording files can be accessed under web GUI->CDR->Recording Files. Advanced Settings Codec Preference are: PCMU, PCMA, GSM, AAL2-G.726-32, G.726, G.722, G.729, G.723, Select audio and video codec for the VoIP trunk. The available codecs DID Mode iLBC, ADPCM, H.264, H.263, H.263p and VP8. Configure where to get the destination ID of an incoming SIP call, from SIP Request-line or To-header. The default is set to "Request-line". Configure the default DTMF mode when sending DTMF on this trunk. Default: The global setting of DTMF mode will be used. The global DTMF Mode setting for DTMF Mode setting is under web UI->PBX->SIP Settings->ToS. RFC2833: Send DTMF using RFC2833. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 159 of 321 Info: Send DTMF using SIP INFO message. Inband: Send DTMF using inband audio. This requires 64 bit codec, i.e., PCMU and PCMA. Auto: Send DTMF using RFC2833 if offered. Otherwise, inband will be used. If enabled, the UCM6200 will regularly send SIP OPTIONS to the device to check if the device is still online. The default setting is "No". When "Enable Qualify" option is set to "Yes", configure the timeout (in ms) Enable Qualify Qualify Timeout for the Qualify SIP message. If no response is received within the timeout, the device is considered offline. The default setting is 1000ms. When "Enable Qualify" option is set to "Yes", configure the interval (in Qualify Frequency seconds) of the SIP OPTIONS message sent to the device to check if the device is still online. The default setting is 60 seconds. Maximum Number of Call The maximum number of concurrent calls using the trunk. The default Lines settings 0, which means no limite. Select Fax mode. The default setting is None. None: Disable Fax. Fax Mode detected and the received Fax will be sent to the Email address Fax Detect: Fax signal from the user/trunk during the call can be configured for this extension. If no Email address can be found for the user, the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Fax/T.38. SRTP Enable SRTP for the VoIP trunk. The default setting is "No". If enabled, the local UCM6200 will automatically provide and update the local LDAP contacts to the remote UCM6200 SIP peer trunk. In order to Sync LDAP Enable ensure successful synchronization, the remote UCM6200 peer also needs to enable this option on the SIP peer trunk. The default setting is
"No". Sync LDAP Password during the LDAP sync process. The password must be the same on both This is the password used for LDAP contact file encryption and decryption Sync LDAP Port UCM6200 peers o ensure successful synchronization. Configure the TCP port used LDAP sync feature between two peer UCM6200. LDAP Outbound Rule automatically modify the remote contacts by adding prefix parsed from Specify an outbound rule for LDAP sync feature. The UCM6200 will LDAP Dialed Prefix CC Settings Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 this rule. Specify the prefix for LDAP sync feature. The UCM6200 will automatically modify the remote contacts by adding this prefix. UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 160 of 321 Enable CC CC Max Agents CC Max Monitors Type Provider Name Host Name Keep Trunk CID Username Password If enabled, the system will automatically alert the user when a called party is available, given that a previous call to that party failed for some reason. Configure the maximum number of CCSS agents which may be allocated for this channel. In other words, this number serves as the maximum number of CC requests this channel is allowed to make. The minimum value is 1. Configure the maximum number of monitor structures which may be created for this device. In other words, this number tells how many callers may request CC services for a specific device at one time. The minimum value is 1. Table 52: Create New IAX Trunk Select the VoIP trunk type. Peer IAX Trunk Register IAX Trunk Configure a unique label to identify this trunk when listed in outbound rules, inbound rules and etc. Configure the IP address or URL for the VoIP providers server of the trunk. If enabled, the trunk CID will not be overridden by extension's CID when the extension has CID configured. The default setting is "No". Enter the username to register to the trunk from the provider when
"Register IAX Trunk" type is selected. Enter the password to register to the trunk from the provider when
"Register IAX Trunk" type is selected. Disable This Trunk If selected, the trunk will be disabled. Basic Settings Provider Name Host Name Keep Trunk CID Table 53: IAX Register Trunk Configuration Parameters Configure a unique label to identify this trunk when listed in outbound rules, inbound rules and etc. Configure the IP address or URL for the VoIP providers server of the trunk. If enabled, the trunk CID will not be overridden by extension's CID when the extension has CID configured. The default setting is "No". Disable This Trunk If selected, the trunk will be disabled. Caller ID Configure the Caller ID. This is the number that the trunk will try to use when making outbound calls. For some providers, it might not be possible Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 161 of 321 to set the CallerID with this option and this option will be ignored. When making outgoing calls, the following rules are used to determine which CallerID will be used if they exist:
The CallerID configured for the extension will be looked up first. If no CallerID configured for the extension, the CallerID configured for the trunk will be used. If the above two are missing, the "Global Outbound CID" defined in Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->General will be used. Configure the name of the caller to be displayed when the extension has no CallerID Name configured. Enter the username to register to the trunk from the provider. Enter the password to register to the trunk from the provider. CallerID Name Username Password Advanced Settings Codec Preference are: PCMU, PCMA, GSM, AAL2-G.726-32, G.726, G.722, G.729, G.723, Select audio and video codec for the VoIP trunk. The available codecs Enable Qualify iLBC, ADPCM, H.264, H.263, H.263p and VP8. If enabled, the UCM6200 will regularly send SIP OPTIONS to the device to check if the device is still online. The default setting is "No". When "Enable Qualify" option is set to "Yes", configure the timeout (in ms) Qualify Timeout for the Qualify SIP message. If no response is received within the timeout, the device is considered offline. The default setting is 1000ms. When "Enable Qualify" option is set to "Yes", configure the interval (in Qualify Frequency seconds) of the SIP OPTIONS message sent to the device to check if the device is still online. The default setting is 60 seconds. Maximum Number of Call The maximum number of concurrent calls using the trunk. The default Lines settings 0, which means no limited. Select Fax mode. The default setting is None. None: Disable Fax. Fax Mode detected and the received Fax will be sent to the Email address Fax Detect: Fax signal from the user/trunk during the call can be configured for this extension. If no Email address can be found for the user, the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Fax/T.38. Table 54: IAX Peer Trunk Configuration Parameters Configure a unique label to identify this trunk when listed in outbound rules, inbound rules and etc. Basic Settings Provider Name Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 162 of 321 Host Name Keep Trunk CID Configure the IP address or URL for the VoIP providers server of the trunk. If enabled, the trunk CID will not be overridden by extension's CID when the extension has CID configured. The default setting is "No". Disable This Trunk If selected, the trunk will be disabled. Configure the Caller ID. This is the number that the trunk will try to use when making outbound calls. For some providers, it might not be possible to set the CallerID with this option and this option will be ignored. When making outgoing calls, the following rules are used to determine which CallerID will be used if they exist:
The CallerID configured for the extension will be looked up first. If no CallerID configured for the extension, the CallerID configured for the trunk will be used. If the above two are missing, the "Global Outbound CID" defined in Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->General will be used. Configure the name of the caller to be displayed when the extension has no CallerID Name configured. Caller ID CallerID Name Advanced Settings Codec Preference are: PCMU, PCMA, GSM, AAL2-G.726-32, G.726, G.722, G.729, G.723, Select audio and video codec for the VoIP trunk. The available codecs Enable Qualify iLBC, ADPCM, H.264, H.263, H.263p and VP8. If enabled, the UCM6200 will regularly send SIP OPTIONS to the device to check if the device is still online. The default setting is "No". When "Enable Qualify" option is set to "Yes", configure the timeout (in ms) Qualify Timeout for the Qualify SIP message. If no response is received within the timeout, the device is considered offline. The default setting is 1000ms. When "Enable Qualify" option is set to "Yes", configure the interval (in Qualify Frequency seconds) of the SIP OPTIONS message sent to the device to check if the device is still online. The default setting is 60 seconds. Maximum Number of Call The maximum number of concurrent calls using the trunk. The default Lines settings 0, which means no limited. Select Fax mode. The default setting is None. None: Disable Fax. Fax Mode detected and the received Fax will be sent to the Email address Fax Detect: Fax signal from the user/trunk during the call can be configured for this extension. If no Email address can be found for the user, the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Fax/T.38. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 163 of 321 DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING (DOD) The UCM6200 provides Direct Outward Dialing (DOD) which is a service of a local phone company (or local exchange carrier) that allows subscribers within a company's PBX system to connect to outside lines directly. Example of how DOD is used:
Company ABC has a SIP trunk. This SIP trunk has 4 DIDs associated to it. The main number of the office is routed to an auto attendant. The other three numbers are direct lines to specific users of the company. At the moment when a user makes an outbound call their caller ID shows up as the main office number. This poses a problem as the CEO would like their calls to come from their direct line. This can be accomplished by configuring DOD for the CEOs extension. Steps on how to configure DOD on the UCM6200:
1. To setup DOD go to UCM6200 web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->VoIP Trunks page. 2. Click to access the DOD options for the selected SIP Trunk. 3. Click "Create a new DOD" to begin your DOD setup 4. For "DOD Number" enter one of the numbers (DIDs) from your SIP trunk provider. In the example above Company ABC received 4 DIDs from their provider. ABC will enter in the number for the CEO's direct line. 5. Select an extension from the "Available Extensions" list. Users have the option of selecting more than one extension. In this case, Company ABC would select the CEO's extension. After making the selection, click on the button to move the extension(s) to the "Selected Extensions" list. Figure 97: DOD extension selection Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 164 of 321 6. Click "Save" at the bottom. Once completed, the user will return to the EDIT DOD page that shows all the extensions that are associated to a particular DOD. Figure 98: Edit DOD Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 165 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 166 of 321 SLA STATION The UCM6200 supports SLA that allows mapping the key with LED on a multi-line phone to different external lines. When there is an incoming call and the phone starts to ring, the LED on the key will flash in red and the call can be picked up by pressing this key. This allows users to know if the line is occupied or not. The SLA function on the UCM6200 is similar to BLF but SLA is used to monitor external line i.e., analog trunk on the UCM6200. Users could configure the phone with BLF mode on the MPK to monitor the analog trunk status or press the line key pick up call from the analog trunk on the UCM6200. CREATE/EDIT SLA STATION SLA Station can be configured on web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->SLA Station. Figure 99: SLA Station Click on Create New SLA Station to add a SLA Station. Click on to edit the SLA Station. The following table shows the SLA Station configuration parameters. Click on to delete the SLA Station. Station Name Configure a name to identify the SLA Station. Table 55: SLA Station Configuration Parameters Station Specify a SIP extension as a station that will be using SLA. Available SLA Trunks Existing Analog Trunks with SLA Mode enabled will be listed here. Selected SLA Trunks SLA Station Options Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 Select a trunk for this SLA from the Available SLA Trunks list. Click on to arrange the order. If there are multiple trunks selected, when there are calls on those trunks at the same time, pressing the LINE key on the phone will pick up the call on the first trunk here. UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 167 of 321 Ring Timeout considered unanswered. No timeout is set by default. If set to 0, there will Configure the time (in seconds) to ring the station before the call is be no timeout. Ring Delay a call first coming in on the shared line. No delay is set by default. If set to Configure the time (in seconds) for delay before ringing the station when 0, there will be no delay. This option defines the competence of the hold action for one particular trunk. If set to open, any station could hold a call on that trunk or resume one held session; if set to private, only the station that places the trunk call on hold could resume the session. The default setting is open. Hold Access SAMPLE CONFIGURATION 1. On the UCM6200, go to web UI->Basic/Call Routes->Analog Trunks page. Create analog trunk or edit the existing analog trunk. Make sure SLA Mode is enabled for the analog trunk. Once enabled, this analog trunk will be only available for the SLA stations created under web UI->Basic/Call Routes->SLA Station page. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 168 of 321 Figure 100: Enable SLA Mode for Analog Trunk Click on Save. The analog trunk will be listed with trunk mode SLA. Figure 101: Analog Trunk with SLA Mode Enabled 2. On the UCM6200, go to web UI->Basic/Call Routes->SLA Station page, click on Create New SLA Station. Please refer to section [CREATE/EDIT SLA STATION] for the configuration parameters. Users can create one or more SLA stations to monitor the analog trunk. The following figure shows two stations, 1002 and 1005, are configured to be associated with SLA trunk fxo1. 3. On the SIP phone 1, configure to register UCM6200 extension 1002. Configure the MPK as BLF mode Figure 102: SLA Example - SLA Station Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 169 of 321 and the value must be set to extension_trunkname, which is 1002_fxo1 in this case. 4. On the SIP phone 2, configure to register UCM6200 extension 1005. Configure the MPK as BLF mode and value must be set to extension_trunkname, which is 1005_fxo1 in this case. Figure 103: SLA Example - MPK Configuration Now the SLA station is ready to use. The following functions can be achieved by this configuration. Making an outbound call from the station/extension, using LINE key When the extension is in idle state, pressing the line key for this extension on the phone to off hook. Then dial the stations extension number, for example, dial 1002 on phone 1 (or dial 1005 on phone 2), to hear the dial tone. Then the users could dial external number for the outbound call. Making an outbound call from the station/extension, using BLF key When the extension is in idle state, pressing the MPK and users could dial external numbers directly. Answering call using LINE key When the station is ringing, pressing the LINE key to answer the incoming call. Barging-in active call using BLF key When there is an active call between an SLA station and an external number using the SLA trunk, other SLA stations monitoring the same trunk could join the call by pressing the BLF key if Barge Allowed is enabled for the analog trunk. Hold/Unhold using BLF key If the external line is previously put on hold by an SLA station, another station that monitors the same SLA trunk could unhold the call by pressing the BLF key if Hold Access is set to open on the analog trunk and the SLA station. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 170 of 321 CALL ROUTES OUTBOUND ROUTES In the UCM6200, an outgoing calling rule pairs an extension pattern with a trunk used to dial the pattern. This allows different patterns to be dialed through different trunks (e.g., "Local" 7-digit dials through a FXO while "Long distance" 10-digit dials through a low-cost SIP trunk). Users can also set up a failover trunk to be used when the primary trunk fails. Go to Web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Outbound Routes to add and edit outbound rules. Click on "Create New Outbound Rule" to add a new outbound route. Click on to edit the outbound route. Click on to delete the outbound route. On the UCM6200, the outbound route priority is based on Best matching pattern. For example, the UCM6200 has outbound route A with pattern 1xxx and outbound route B with pattern 10xx configured. When dialing 1000 for outbound call, outbound route B will always be used first. This is because pattern 10xx is a better match than pattern 1xxx. Only when there are multiple outbound routes with the same pattern configured, users can click on to move the outbound route up/down to arrange the priority among those outbound routes. Calling Rule Name Pattern Password Call Duration Limit Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 Table 56: Outbound Route Configuration Parameters Configure the name of the calling rule (e.g., local, long_distance, and etc). Letters, digits, _ and - are allowed. All patterns are prefixed with the "_". Special characters:
X: Any Digit from 0-9. Z: Any Digit from 1-9. N: Any Digit from 2-9.
".": Wildcard. Match one or more characters.
"!": Wildcard. Match zero or more characters immediately. Example: [12345-9] - Any digit from 1 to 9. Configure the password for users to use this rule when making outbound calls. Enable to configure the maximum duration for the call using this outbound route. UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 171 of 321 Maximum Call Duration Configure the maximum duration of the call (in seconds). The default setting is 0, which means no limit. Warning Time x seconds, the warning tone will be played to the caller when x seconds Configure the warning time for the call using this outbound route. If set to are left to end the call. Warning Repeat Interval route. If set to x seconds, the warning tone will be played every x seconds Configure the warning repeat interval for the call using this outbound Privilege Level after the first warning. Select privilege level for the outbound rule. Internal: The lowest level required. All users can use this rule. Local: Users with Local, National, or International level are allowed to use this rule. National: Users with National or International level are allowed to use this rule. International: The highest level required. Only users with international level can use this rule. Disable: The default setting is "Disable". If selected, only the matched source caller ID will be allowed to use this outbound route. Please be aware of the potential security risks when using "Internal" level, which means all users can use this outbound rule to dial out from the trunk. When enabled, users could specify extensions allowed to use this outbound route. "Privilege Level" is automatically disabled if using
"Enable Filter on Source Caller ID". The following two methods can be used at the same time to define the extensions as the source caller ID. 1. Select available extensions/extension groups from the left to the right. This allows users to specify arbitrary single extensions available in the PBX. Enable Filter on Source 2. Custom Dynamic Route: define the pattern for the source caller ID. Caller ID This allows users to define extension range instead of selecting them one by one. All patterns are prefixed with the "_". Special characters:
X: Any Digit from 0-9. Z: Any Digit from 1-9. N: Any Digit from 2-9.
".": Wildcard. Match one or more characters.
"!": Wildcard. Match zero or more characters immediately. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 172 of 321 Send This Call Through Trunk Use Trunk Select the trunk for this outbound rule. Example: [12345-9] - Any digit from 1 to 9. Allows the user to specify the number of digits that will be stripped from the beginning of the dialed string before the call is placed via the selected Strip trunk. Example:
The users will dial 9 as the first digit of a long distance calls. However, 9 should not be sent out via analog lines and the PSTN line. In this case, 1 digit should be stripped before the call is placed. Specify the digits to be prepended before the call is placed via the trunk. Those digits will be prepended after the dialing number is stripped. Failover trunks can be used to make sure that a call goes through an alternate route, when the primary trunk is busy or down. If "Use Failover Trunk" is enabled and "Failover trunk" is defined, the calls that cannot be placed via the regular trunk may have a secondary trunk to go through. Example:
The user's primary trunk is a VoIP trunk and the user would like to use the PSTN when the VoIP trunk is not available. The PSTN trunk can be configured as the failover trunk of the VoIP trunk. Allows the user to specify the number of digits that will be stripped from the beginning of the dialed string before the call is placed via the selected trunk. Example:
The users will dial 9 as the first digit of a long distance calls. However, 9 should not be sent out via analog lines and the PSTN line. In this case, 1 digit should be stripped before the call is placed. Specify the digits to be prepended before the call is placed via the trunk. Those digits will be prepended after the dialing number is stripped. Prepend Use Failover Trunk Failover Trunk Strip Prepend INBOUND ROUTES Inbound routes can be configured via Web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Inbound Routes. Click on "Create New Inbound Rule" to add a new inbound route. Click on "Blacklist" to configure blacklist for all inbound routes. Click on to edit the inbound route. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 173 of 321 Click on to delete the inbound route. INBOUND RULE CONFIGURATIONS Trunks Select the trunk to configure the inbound rule. Table 57: Inbound Rule Configuration Parameters DID Pattern All patterns are prefixed with the "_". Special characters:
X: Any Digit from 0-9. Z: Any Digit from 1-9. N: Any Digit from 2-9.
".": Wildcard. Match one or more characters.
"!": Wildcard. Match zero or more characters immediately. Example: [12345-9] - Any digit from 1 to 9. The pattern can be composed of two parts, divided by a / character. The first part is used to specify the dialed number the second part is used to specify the caller ID and it is optional, if set it means only the extension with the specific caller ID is allowed to call in or call out. For example, patter '_2XXX/1234' means the only extension with the caller ID '1234' is allowed to use this rule. Prepend Trunk Name Prepend trunk name to display Alert-Info Inbound Multiple Mode Configure the Alert-Info, when UCM6200 receives an INVITE request, the Alert-Info header field specifies an alternative ring tone to the UAS. Multiple mode allows user to switch between destinations of the inbound rule by feature codes. Configure related feature codes in the Feature Codes page. If this option is enabled, user can use feature code to switch between different destinations. Select the default destination for the inbound call. Default Destination Extension Voicemail Conference Room Queue Ring Group Paging/Intercom Voicemail Group Fax DISA IVR Dial By Name Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 174 of 321 External Number By DID When "By DID" is used, the UCM6200 will look for the destination based on the number dialed, which could be local extensions, conference, call queue, ring group, paging/intercom group, IVR, voicemail groups and Fax extension as configured in "DID destination". If the dialed number matches the DID pattern, the call will be allowed to go through. Configure the number of digits to be stripped from the beginning of the DID. This option shows up only when "By DID" is selected. Configure the number of digits to be prepended to an inbound DID pattern, with strip taking precedence over prepend. This option shows up only when "By DID" is selected. If enabled, the Strip Prepend Dial Trunk external users dialing in to the trunk via this inbound route can dial outbound call using the UCM6200s trunk. This option shows up only when "By DID" is selected. This controls the destination that can be reached by the external caller via the inbound route. The DID destination are:
DID Destination Extension Conference Call Queue Ring Group Paging/Intercom Groups IVR Voicemail Groups Fax Extension Dial By Name All Time Condition Time Conditions Select the time condition for the inbound rule. Destination Select the destination for the inbound call during the specified time condition. INBOUND ROUTE: PREPEND EXAMPLE UCM6200 now allows user to prepend digits to an inbound DID pattern, with strip taking precedence over prepend. With the ability to prepend digits in inbound route DID pattern, user no longer needs to create multiple routes for the same trunk in order to route calls to different extensions. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 175 of 321 Figure 104: Inbound Route feature: Prepend The following example demonstrates the process, 1. If Trunk provides a DID pattern of 18005251163. 2. If Strip is set to 8, UCM6200 will strip the first 8 digits. 3. If Prepend is set to 2, UCM6200 will then prepend a 2 to the stripped number, now the number become 2163. 4. UCM6200 will now forward the incoming call to extension 2163. INBOUND ROUTE: MULTIPLE MODE In the UCM6200, the user can configure inbound route to enable multiple mode to switch between different destinations. The inbound multiple mode can be enabled under Inbound Route settings. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 176 of 321 Figure 105: Inbound Route - Multiple Mode When Multiple Mode is enabled for the inbound route, the user can configure a Default Destination and a Mode 1 destination for this route. By default, the call coming into this inbound route will be routed to the default destination. SIP end devices that have registered on the UCM6200 can dial feature code *62 to switch to inbound route Mode 1 and dial feature code *61 to switch back to Default Destination. Switching between different mode can be easily done without web UI login. For example, the customer service hotline destination has to be set to a different IVR after 7PM. The user can dial *62 to switch to Mode 1 with that IVR set as the destination before off work. FAX INTELLIGENT ROUTE The UCM6200 can automatically detect Fax and phone signal coming from the FXO port, and then forward Fax or phone signal to the right destination. For example, when a regular phone call is coming, the UCM6200 will be able to detect the phone signal and forward it through the correct inbound route to the destination; if Fax signal is coming, the UCM6200 will be able to forward it to the FXS extension where the Fax machine is connected. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 177 of 321 FAX WITH TWO MEDIA The UCM6200 supports Fax re-invite with multiple codec negotiation. If a Fax re-invite contains both T.38 and PCMA/PCMU codec, UCM6200 will choose T.38 codec over PCMA/PCMU. BLACKLIST CONFIGURATIONS In the UCM6200, Blacklist is supported for all inbound routes. Users could enable the Blacklist feature and manage the Blacklist by clicking on "Blacklist". Select the checkbox for "Blacklist Enable" to turn on Blacklist feature for all inbound routes. Blacklist is disabled by default. Enter a number in "Add Blacklist Number" field and then click to add to the list. To remove a number from the Blacklist, select the number in "Blacklist list" and click on
. Figure 106: Blacklist Configuration Parameters To add blacklist number in batch, click on to upload blacklist file in csv format. The supported csv format is as below. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 178 of 321 Figure 107: Blacklist csv File
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
Note:
Users could also add a number to the Blacklist or remove a number from the Blacklist by dialing the feature code for "Blacklist Add' (default: *40) and "Blacklist Remove" (default: *41) from an extension. The feature code can be configured under Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Feature Codes. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 179 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 180 of 321 CONFERENCE BRIDGE The UCM6200 supports conference bridge allowing multiple bridges used at the same time:
UCM6202/6204 supports up to 3 conference bridges allowing up to 25 simultaneous PSTN or IP participants. UCM6208 supports up to 6 conference bridges allowing up to 32 simultaneous PSTN or IP participants. The conference bridge configurations can be accessed under Web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Conference. In this page, users could create, edit, view, invite, manage the participants and delete conference bridges. The conference bridge status and conference call recordings (if recording is enabled) will be displayed in this web page as well. CONFERENCE BRIDGE CONFIGURATIONS Click on "Create New Conference Room" to add a new conference bridge. Click on to edit the conference bridge. Click on to delete the conference bridge. Extension Password Table 58: Conference Bridge Configuration Parameters Configure the conference number for the users to dial into the conference. When configured, the users who would like to join the conference call must enter this password before accessing the conference bridge. Note:
If "Public Mode" is enabled, the password is not required to join the conference bridge thus this field is invalid. The password has to be at least 4 characters. Configure the password to join the conference bridge as administrator. Conference administrator can manage the conference call via IVR (if
"Enable Caller Menu" is enabled) as well as invite other parties to join the Admin Password conference by dialing "0" (permission required from the invited party) or
"1" (permission not required from the invited party) during the conference call. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 181 of 321 Enable Caller Menu Record Conference Note:
If "Public Mode" is enabled, the password is not required to join the conference bridge thus this field is invalid. The password has to be at least 4 characters. If enabled, conference participant could press the * key to access the conference bridge menu. The default setting is "No". If enabled, the calls in this conference bridge will be recorded automatically in a .wav format file. All the recording files will be displayed and can be downloaded in the conference web page. The default setting is "No". If enabled, if there are users joining or leaving the conference, voice prompt or notification tone won't be played. The default setting is "No". Quiet Mode Note:
"Quiet Mode" and "Announce Callers" cannot be enabled at the same time. If enabled, the participants will not hear each other until the conference administrator joins the conference. The default setting is "No". Wait For Admin Note:
If "Quiet Mode" is enabled, the voice prompt for "Wait For Admin" will not be announced. If enabled, users could press 0 to invite other users (with the users'
permission) or press 1 to invite other users (without the user's permission) to join the conference. The default setting is "No". Enable User Invite Note:
Conference administrator can always invite other users without enabling this option. If enabled, the caller will be announced to all conference participants when there the caller joins the conference. The default setting is "No". Announce Callers Note:
Public Mode Play Hold Music
"Quiet Mode" and "Announce Callers" cannot be enabled at the same time. If enabled, no authentication will be required when joining the conference call. The default setting is "Yes". If enabled, the UCM6200 will play Hold music when there is only one user in the conference. The default setting is "No". Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 182 of 321 Music On Hold Hold class can be set up under web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Music Select the music on hold class to be played in conference call. Music On On Hold. Skip Authentication When If enabled, the invitation from Web GUI for a conference bridge with Inviting User via Trunk from password will skip the authentication for the invited users. The default Web GUI setting is "No". JOIN A CONFERENCE CALL Users could dial the conference bridge extension to join the conference. If password is required, enter the password to join the conference as a normal user, or enter the admin password to join the conference as administrator. INVITE OTHER PARTIES TO JOIN CONFERENCE When using the UCM6200 conference bridge, there are two ways to invite other parties to join the conference. Invite from Web GUI. For each conference bridge in UCM6200 Web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Conference, there is an icon for option "Invite a participant". Click on it and enter the number of the party you would like to invite. Then click on "Add". A call will be sent to this number to join it into the conference. Figure 108: Conference Invitation From Web GUI Invite by dialing 0 or 1 during conference call. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 183 of 321 A conference participant can invite other parties to the conference by dialing from the phone during the conference call. Please make sure option "Enable User Invite" is turned on for the conference bridge first. Enter 0 or 1 during the conference call. Follow the voice prompt to input the number of the party you would like to invite. A call will be sent to this number to join it into the conference. 0: If 0 is entered to invite other party, once the invited party picks up the invitation call, a permission will be asked to "accept" or "reject" the invitation before joining the conference. 1: If 1 is entered to invite other party, no permission will be required from the invited party.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note:
Conference administrator can always invite other parties from the phone during the call by entering 0 or 1. To join a conference bridge as administrator, enter the admin password when joining the conference. A conference bridge can have multiple administrators.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
DURING THE CONFERENCE During the conference call, users can manage the conference from web GUI or IVR. Manage the conference call from Web GUI. Log in UCM6200 web GUI during the conference call, the participants in each conference bridge will be listed. 1. Click on to kick a participant from the conference. 2. Click on to mute the participant. 3. Click on to lock this conference bridge so that other users cannot join it anymore. 4. Click on to invite other users into the conference bridge. Manage the conference call from IVR. If "Enable Caller Menu" is enabled, conference participant can input * to enter the IVR menu for the conference. Please see options listed in the table below. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 184 of 321 Table 59: Conference Caller IVR Menu Conference Administrator IVR Menu Mute/unmute yourself. Lock/unlock the conference bridge. Kick the last joined user from the conference. Decrease the volume of the conference call. Decrease your volume. Increase the volume of the conference call. Increase your volume. More options. 1: List all users currently in the conference call. 2: Kick all non-Administrator participants from the conference call. 3: Mute/Unmute all non-Administrator participants from the conference call. 4: Record the conference call. 8: Exit the caller menu and return to the conference. Conference User IVR Menu Mute/unmute yourself. Decrease the volume of the conference call. Decrease your volume. Increase the volume of the conference call. Increase your volume. Exit the caller menu and return to the conference. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 4 5 6 7 8
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Note:
When there is participant in the conference, the conference bridge configuration cannot be modified.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
RECORD CONFERENCE The UCM6200 allows users to record the conference call and retrieve the recording from web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Conference. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 185 of 321 To record the conference call, when the conference bridge is in idle, enable "Record Conference" from the conference bridge configuration dialog. Save the setting and apply the change. When the conference call starts, the call will be automatically recorded in .wav format. The recording files will be listed as below once available. Users could click on to download the recording or click on to delete the recording. Users could also delete all recording files by clicking on Delate All Recording Files, or delete multiple recording files at once by clicking on Delete Selected Recording Files after selecting the recording files. Figure 109: Conference Recording Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 186 of 321 CONFERENCE SCHEDULE CONFERENCE SCHEUDLE CONFIGURATION Conference Schedule can be found under UCM6200 web UI->PBX->Call Features->Conference Schedule. Users can create, edit, view and delete a Conference Schedule. Click on Create New Conference Schedule to add a new Conference Schedule. Click on the scheduled conference to edit or delete the event. After the user configures UCM6200 with Google Service Settings [GOOGLE SERVICE SETTINGS SUPPORT]
and enables Google Calendar for Conference Schedule, the conference schedule on the UCM6200 can be synchronized with Google Calendar for authorized Google account. Schedule Options Conference Topic Table 60: Conference Schedule Parameters Configure the name of the scheduled conference. Letters, digits, _ and -
are allowed. Conference Room Select a conference room for this scheduled conference. Set kick time before conference starts. When kick time is reached, a warning prompt will be played for all attendees in the conference room. After 5 minutes, this conference room will be cleared and locked for the Kick Time(m) scheduled conference to begin. Note: Kick Time cannot be less than 6 minutes in order to clear the conference room. Description The description of scheduled conference. Repeat Schedule Time Repeat interval of scheduled conference. By default its set to single event. Configure the beginning date and duration of scheduled conference. Note: Please pay attention to avoid time conflict on schedules in the same conference room. Select this option to sync scheduled conference with Google Calendar. Enable Google Calendar Note: Google Service Setting OAuth2.0 must be configured on the UCM6200. Please refer to section [GOOGLE SERVICE SETTINGS SUPPORT]. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 187 of 321 Select the administrator of scheduled conference from selected Conference Administrator Note:
extensions. Local Extension Select available extensions from the list to attend scheduled conference. Public Mode must be disabled from Conference Room Options tab. Remote Extension Select available extensions from the remote peer PBX. Note: LDAP Sync must be enabled on the UCM6200 in order to view remote extensions here. Add extensions that are not in the list (both local and remote list). If the Special Extension user wishes to add the special extension, please match the pattern on the outbound route. Remote Conference Invite a remote conference. Conference Room Options Password Admin Password Enable Caller Menu Record Conference Configure conference room password. Please note that if Public Mode is enabled, this option is automatically disabled. Configure the password to join as conference administrator. Please note that if Public Mode is enabled, this option is automatically disabled. If this option is enabled, conference participants will be able to access conference bridge menu by pressing the * key. If this option is enabled, conference call will be recorded in .wav format. The recorded file can be found from Conference page. If this option is enabled, the notification tone or voice prompt for joining or leaving the conference wont be played. Quiet Mode Note: Option Quiet Mode and option Announce Caller cannot be enabled at the same time. If this option is enabled, the participants in the conference wont be able to hear each other until conference administrator joins the conference. Wait For Admin Enable User Invite Note: If Quiet Mode is enabled, voice prompt for this option wont be played. If this option is enabled, the user can:
Press 0 to invite others to join the conference with invited partys permission Press 1 to invite without invited partys permission Press 2 to create a multi-conference bridge to another conference room Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 188 of 321 Press 3 to drop all current multi-conference bridges Note: Conference Administrator is always allowed to access this menu. If this option is enabled, when a participant joins the conference room, participants name will be announced to all members in the conference Announce Callers room. Note: Option Quiet Mode and option Announce Caller cannot be enabled at the same time. If this option is enabled, no authentication is required for entering the Public Mode conference room. Note: Please be aware of the potential security risks when turning on this option. Play Hold Music one participant in the conference room or the conference is not yet If this option is enabled, UCM6200 will play Hold Music while there is only started. If this option is enabled, the invitation from Web GUI via a trunk with Skip Authentication When password wont require authentication. Inviting Users via Trunk from Web GUI Note: Please be aware of the potential security risks when turning on this option. Cleaner Options Cleaner Options Enable Conference If this option is enabled, conference schedules will be automatically Schedules Cleaner cleaned as configured. Conference Schedules Clean Time Enter the clean time (in hours). The valid range is from 0 to 23. Clean Interval Enter the clean interval (in days). The valid range is from 1 to 30. Show/hide Conference Schedule Table Enable this option will allow web UI to display scheduled conference in Conference Schedule Table. Please see figure below. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 189 of 321 Figure 110: Conference Schedule Once the conference room is scheduled, at the kick time, all users will be removed from conference room and no extension is allowed to join the conference room anymore. At the scheduled conference time, UCM6200 will send INVITE to the extensions that have been selected for conference.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------
Note:
Please make sure that outbound route is properly configured for remote extensions to join the conference. Once Kick Time is reached, Conference Schedule is locked and cannot be modified.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 190 of 321 IVR CONFIGURE IVR IVR configurations can be accessed under the UCM6200 Web GUI->PBX->Call Features->IVR. Users could create, edit, view and delete an IVR. Click on "Create New IVR" to add a new IVR. Click on to edit the IVR configuration. Click on to delete the IVR. Basic Settings Name Extension DID Destination Table 61: IVR Configuration Parameters Configure the name of the IVR. Letters, digits, _ and - are allowed. Enter the extension number for users to access the IVR. This option shows up only when "By DID" is selected. This controls the destination that can be reached by the external caller via the inbound route. The DID destination are:
Extension Conference Call Queue Ring Group Paging/Intercom Groups Voicemail Groups Fax Extension Dial By Name All Dial Trunk must be configured for the users to use the trunk first. The default setting If enabled, all callers to the IVR is allowed to use trunk. The permission is "No". Assign permission level for outbound calls if "Dial Trunk" is enabled. The available permissions are
"Internal",
"Local",
"National" and
"International" from the lowest level to the highest level. The default Permission setting is "Internal". If the user tries to dial outbound calls after dialing into the IVR, the UCM6200 will compared the IVR's permission level with the outbound route's privilege level. If the IVR's permission level is higher than (or equal to) the outbound route's privilege level, the call will be Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 191 of 321 allowed to go through. Welcome Prompt
"Prompt"
to add additional audio file under web GUI->Internal Select an audio file to play as the welcome prompt for the IVR. Click on Digit Timeout Response Timeout Options->IVR Prompt. Configure the timeout between digit entries. After the user enters a digit, the user needs to enter the next digit within the timeout. If no digit is detected within the timeout, the UCM6200 will consider the entries complete. The default timeout is 3 seconds. After playing the prompts in the IVR, the UCM6200 will wait for the DTMF entry within the timeout (in seconds). If no DTMF entry is detected within the timeout, a timeout prompt will be played. The default setting is 10 seconds. Response Timeout Prompt Select the prompt message to be played when timeout occurs. Invalid Prompt Select the prompt message to be played when an invalid extension is pressed. Response Timeout Repeat Loops Configure the number of times to repeat the prompt if no DTMF input is detected. When the loop ends, it will go to the timeout destination if configured, or hang up. The default setting is 3. Invalid Repeat Loops invalid. When the loop ends, it will go to the invalid destination if Configure the number of times to repeat the prompt if the DTMF input is configured, or hang up. The default setting is 3. Select the voice prompt language to be used for this IVR. The default setting is "Default" which is the selected voice prompt language under web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Language. The dropdown list Language shows all the current available voice prompt languages on the UCM6200. To add more languages in the list, please download voice prompt package by selecting
"Check Prompt List"
under web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Language. Key Pressing Events Key Press Event:
Select the event for each key pressing for 0-9, *, Timeout and Invalid. The Press 0 Press 1 Press 2 Press 3 Press 4 Press 5 Press 6 Press 7 Press 8 event options are:
Extension Voicemail Conference Rooms Voicemail Group IVR Ring Group Queues Page Group Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 192 of 321 Press 9 Press *
Timeout Invalid Fax Custom Prompt Hangup DISA Dial By Name External Number Callback CREATE CUSTOM PROMPT To record new IVR prompt or upload IVR prompt to be used in IVR, click on Prompt next to the Welcome Prompt option and the users will be redirected to Custom Prompt page. Or users could go to Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Custom Prompt page directly. Figure 111: Click on Prompt to Create IVR Prompt Once the IVR prompt file is successfully added to the UCM6200, it will be added into the prompt list options for users to select in different IVR scenarios. RECORD NEW CUSTOM PROMPT Settings In the UCM6200 web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Custom Prompt page, click on Record New Custom Prompt and follow the steps below to record new IVR prompt. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 193 of 321 Figure 112: Record New Custom Prompt Specify the IVR file name. Select the format (GSM or WAV) for the IVR prompt file to be recorded. Select the extension to receive the call from the UCM6200 to record the IVR prompt. Click the Record button. A request will be sent to the UCM6200. The UCM6200 will then call the extension for recording the IVR prompt from the phone. Pick up the call from the extension and start the recording following the voice prompt. The recorded file will be listed in the IVR Prompt web page. Users could select to re-record, play or delete the recording. UPLOAD CUSTOM PROMPT If the user has a pre-recorded IVR prompt file, click on Upload Custom Prompt in Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Custom Prompt page to upload the file to the UCM6200. The following are required for the IVR prompt file to be successfully uploaded and used by the UCM6200:
PCM encoded. 16 bits. 8000Hz mono. In .mp3 or .wav format; or raw/ulaw/alaw/gsm file with .ulaw or .alaw suffix. File size under 5M. Figure 113: Upload Custom Prompt Click on to select audio file from local PC and click on to start uploading. Once uploaded, the file will appear in the Custom Prompt web page. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 194 of 321 LANGUAGE SETTINGS FOR VOICE PROMPT The UCM6200 supports multiple languages in web GUI as well as system voice prompt. Currently, there are 16 languages supported in system voice prompt: English (United States), Arabic, Chinese, Dutch, English (United Kingdom), French, German, Greek, Hebrew, Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish and Turkish. English (United States) and Chinese voice prompts are built in with the UCM6200 already. The other languages provided by Grandstream can be downloaded and installed from the UCM6200 web GUI directly. Additionally, users could customize their own voice prompts, package them and upload to the UCM6200. Language settings for voice prompt can be accessed under Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Language. DOWNLOAD AND INSTALL VOICE PROMPT PACKAGE To download and install voice prompt package in different languages from UCM6200 web GUI, click on
"Check Prompt List" button. Figure 114: Language Settings for Voice Prompt A new dialog window of voice prompt package list will be displayed. Users can see the version number
(latest version available V.S. current installed version), package size and options to upgrade or download the language. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 195 of 321 Figure 115: Voice Prompt Package List Click on to download the language to the UCM6200. The installation will be automatically started once the downloading is finished. Figure 116: New Voice Prompt Language Added A new language option will be displayed after successfully installed. Users then could select it to apply in the UCM6200 system voice prompt or delete it from the UCM6200. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 196 of 321 CUSTOMIZE SPECIFIC PROMPT On the UCM6200, if the user needs to replace some specific customized prompt, the user can upload a single specific customized prompt from web UI->PBX->Internal Options->Language instead of the entire language pack. Figure 117: Upload Single Voice Prompt for Entire Language Pack Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 197 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 198 of 321 VOICEMAIL CONFIGURE VOICEMAIL If the voicemail is enabled for UCM6200 extensions, the configurations of the voicemail can be globally set up and managed under Web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Voicemail. Max Greeting Table 62: Voicemail Settings Configure the maximum number of seconds for the voicemail greeting. The default setting is 60 seconds. If enabled, the caller can press 0 to exit the voicemail application and Dial 0 For Operator connect to the configured operators extension. The operator extension can be configured under web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->General. Max Messages Per Folder Configure the maximum number of messages per folder in users voicemail. The valid range 10 to 1000. The default setting is 50. Select the maximum duration of the voicemail message. The message will not be recorded if the duration exceeds the max message time. The default setting is 15 minutes. The available options are:
Max Message Time 1 minute 2 minutes 5 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes Unlimited Configure the minimum duration (in seconds) of a voicemail message. Messages will be automatically deleted if the duration is shorter than the Min Message Time. The default setting is 3 seconds. The available Min Effective Message Time options are:
No minimum 1 second 2 seconds 3 seconds 4 seconds 5 seconds Note:
Silence and noise duration are not counted in message time. Announce Message Caller-ID If enabled, the caller ID of the user who has left the message will be announced at the beginning of the voicemail message. The default setting Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 199 of 321 is "No". Announce Message Duration If enabled, the message duration will be announced at the beginning of the voicemail message. The default setting is "No". Play Envelope each message will be played when accessed from the voicemail If enabled, a brief introduction (received time, received from, and etc) of application. The default setting is "Yes". If enabled, UCM will play from the voice message left most recently; if disabled, UCM will play from the earliest left voice message If enabled, users can review the message following the IVR before sending the message out. The default setting is "No". Play from Last Allow User Review ACCESS VOICEMAIL If the voicemail is enabled for UCM6200 extensions, the users can dial the voicemail access feature code
(by default *98 or *97) to access the extensions voicemail. The users will be prompt to enter the voicemail password and then can enter digits from the phone keypad to navigate in the IVR menu for different options. Main Menu Sub Menu 1 Table 63: Voicemail IVR Menu Sub Menu 2 1 - Send a reply 3 - Advanced options 3 - Hear the message envelop 2 - Call the person who sent this message 4 - Leave a message
* - Return to the main menu 1 - New messages 5 - Repeat the current message 7 - Delete this message 8 - Forward the message to another user 9 Save
* - Help
# - Exit 0 - New messages 1 - Old messages 2 - Change 2 - Work messages folders 3 - Family messages 4 - Friend messages
# - Cancel Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 200 of 321 1 - Send a reply 3 -
2 - Call the person who sent this message Advanced 3 - Hear the message envelop options 4 - Leave a message
* - Return to the main menu 0 - Mailbox options 1 - Record your unavailable message 2 - Listen to it 1 - Accept this recording 3 - Re-record your message 1 - Accept this recording 2 - Record your busy message 2 - Listen to it 3 - Re-record your message 1 - Accept this recording 3 - Record your name 2 - Listen to it 3 - Re-record your message 1 - Accept this recording 4 - Record temporary greeting 2 - Listen to it 3 - Re-record your message 5 - Change your password
* - Return to the main menu VOICEMAIL EMAIL SETTINGS The UCM6200 can be configured to send the voicemail as attachment to Email. Click on "Voicemail Email Settings" button to configure the Email attributes and content. Table 64: Voicemail Email Settings Attach Recordings to E-Mail Keep Recordings If enabled, voicemails will be sent to user's Email address. The default setting is "Yes". If enabled, voicemail will be stored in the UCM6200 after the email is sent. The default setting is Yes. Fill in the "Subject:" and "Message:" content, to be used in the Email Template For Voicemail Emails when sending to the user. The template variables are:
\t: TAB
${VM_NAME}: Recipient's first name and last name Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 201 of 321
${VM_DUR}: The duration of the voicemail message
${VM_MAILBOX}: The recipient's extension
${VM_CALLERID}: The caller ID of the person who has left the message
${VM_MSGNUM}: The number of messages in the mailbox
${VM_DATE}: The date and time when the message is left Figure 118: Voicemail Email Settings Click on "Load Default Settings" button to view the default template as an example. CONFIGURE VOICEMAIL GROUP The UCM6200 supports voicemail group and all the extensions added in the group will receive the voicemail to the group extension. The voicemail group can be configured under Web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Voicemail Group. Click on "Create New Voicemail Group" to configure the group. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 202 of 321 Extension Name Figure 119: Voicemail Group Table 65: Voicemail Group Settings Enter the Voicemail Group Extension. The voicemail messages left to this extension will be forwarded to all the voicemail group members. Configure the Name to identify the voicemail group. Letters, digits, _ and -
are allowed. Voicemail Password Configure the voicemail password for the users to check voicemail messages. Email Address Configure the Email address for the voicemail group extension. Voicemail Group Mailboxes The extensions need to have voicemail enabled to be listed in available Select available mailboxes from the left list and add them to the right list. mailboxes list. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 203 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 204 of 321 RING GROUP The UCM6200 supports ring group feature with different ring strategies applied to the ring group members. This section describes the ring group configuration on the UCM6200. CONFIGURE RING GROUP Ring group settings can be accessed via Web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Ring Group. Click on Create New Ring Group to add ring group. Figure 120: Ring Group Click on to edit the ring group. The following table shows the ring group configuration parameters. Click on to delete the ring group. Table 66: Ring Group Parameters Ring Group Name Configure ring group name to identify the ring group. Letters, digits, _ and are allowed. Extension Configure the ring group extension. Ring Group Members Select available users from the left side to the ring group member list on the right side. Click on to arrange the order. Select available remote users from the left side to the ring group member Selected LDAP Numbers list on the right side. Click on to arrange the order. Note:
LDAP Sync must be enabled first. Select the ring strategy. The default setting is Ring in order. Ring simultaneously. Ring all the members at the same time when there is incoming call to the ring group extension. If any of the member answers the call, it will Ring Strategy stop ringing. Ring in order. Ring the members with the order configured in ring group list. If the first member doesnt answer the call, it will stop ringing the first member and start ringing the second member. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 205 of 321 Custom Prompt This option is to set a custom prompt for a ring group to announce to caller. Click on Prompt, it will direct to the page PBX->Internal Options->Custom Prompt, where users could record new prompt or upload prompt files. Configure the number of seconds to ring each member. If set to 0, it will keep ringing. The default setting is 30 seconds. Ring Timeout on Each Member Note:
The actual ring timeout might be overridden by users if the phone has ring timeout settings as well. If enabled, calls on this ring group will be automatically recorded. The Auto Record default setting is No. The recording files can be accessed from web Enable Destination GUI->CDR->Recording Files. If enabled, users could select extension, voicemail, ring group, IVR, call queue, voicemail group as the destination if the call to the ring group has no answer. Secret and Email address are required if voicemail is selected as the destination. Configure the password to access the ring group extension's voicemail. Secret Note:
The password has to be at least 4 characters. Configure the Email address of the ring group extension's voicemail. If
"Attach Recordings to E-mail"
is enabled from Web GUI->PBX->Voicemail->Voicemail Email Settings, the voicemail can be sent to the ring group's Email address as attachment. Email Address Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 206 of 321 Figure 121: Ring Group Configuration REMOTE EXTENSION IN RING GROUP Remote extensions from the peer trunk of a remote UCM6200 can be included in the ring group with local extension. An example of Ring Group with peer extensions is presented in the following:
1. Creating SIP Peer Trunk between both UCM6200_A and UCM6200_B. SIP Trunk can be found under web UI-> PBX-> Basic/Call Routes-> VoIP Trunks. Also, please configure their Inbound/Outbound routes accordingly. 2. Click edit button in the menu
, and check if Sync LDAP Enable is selected, this option will allow UCM6200_A update remote LDAP server automatically from peer UCM6200_B. In addition, Sync LDAP Password must match for UCM6200_A and UCM6200_B in order to sync LDAP contact automatically. Port number can be anything between 0~65535, and use the outbound rule created in step 1 for the LDAP Outbound Rule option. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 207 of 321 Figure 122: Sync LDAP Server option 3. In case if LDAP server doesnt sync automatically, user can manually sync LDAP server. Under VoIP Trunks page, click sync button shown in the following figure to manually sync LDAP contacts from peer UCM6200. Figure 123: Manually Sync LDAP Server Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 208 of 321 4. Under Ring Groups setting page, click
. Ring Groups can be found under web UI-> PBX-> Call Features-> Ring Groups. 5. If LDAP server is synced correctly, Available LDAP Numbers box will display available remote extensions that can be included in the current ring group. Please also make sure the extensions in the peer UCM6200 can be included into that UCM6200s LDAP contact. Figure 124: Ring Group Remote Extension Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 209 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 210 of 321 PAGING AND INTERCOM GROUP Paging and Intercom Group can be used to make an announcement over the speaker on a group of phones. Targeted phones will answer immediately using speaker. The UCM6200 paging and intercom can be used via feature code to a single extension or a paging/intercom group. This sections describes the configuration of paging/intercom group under Web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Paging/Intercom. CONFIGURE PAGING/INTERCOM GROUP Click on "Create New Paging/Intercom Group" to add paging/intercom group. Name Extension Type Custom Prompt Figure 125: Paging/Intercom Group Table 67: Paging/Intercom Group Configuration Parameters Configure paging/intercom group name. Configure the paging/intercom group extension. Select "2-way Intercom" or "1-way Page". This option is to set a custom prompt for a paging/intercom group to announce to caller. Click on Prompt, it will direct to the page PBX->Internal Options->Custom Prompt, where users could record new prompt or upload prompt files. Page/Intercom Group Select available users from the left side to the paging/intercom group Members member list on the right. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 211 of 321 Click on to edit the paging/intercom group. Click on to delete the paging/intercom group. Click on "Paging/Intercom Group Settings" to edit Alert-Info Header. This header will be included in the SIP INVITE message sent to the callee in paging/intercom call. Figure 126: Page/Intercom Group Settings The UCM6200 has pre-configured paging/intercom feature code. By default, the Paging Prefix is *81 and the Intercom Prefix is *80. To edit page/intercom feature code, click on "Feature Codes" in the
"Paging/Intercom Group Settings" dialog. Or users could go to Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Feature Codes directly. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 212 of 321 CALL QUEUE The UCM6200 supports call queue by using static agents or dynamic agents. Call Queue system can accept more calls than the available agents. Incoming calls will be held until next representative is available in the system. This section describes the configuration of call queue under Web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Call Queue. CONFIGURE CALL QUEUE Call queue settings can be accessed via Web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Call Queue. Figure 127: Call Queue Click on "Create New Queue" to add call queue. Click on to edit the call queue. The call queue configuration parameters are listed in the table below. Extension Name Table 68: Call Queue Configuration Parameters Configure the call queue extension. Configure the call queue name to identify the call queue. Select the strategy for the call queue. Ring All Strategy Ring all available Agents simultaneously until one answers. Linear Ring agents in the specified order. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 213 of 321 Least Recent Ring the agent who has been called the least recently. Fewest Calls Ring the agent with the fewest completed calls. Random Ring a random agent. Round Robin Ring the agents in Round Robin scheduling with memory. The default setting is "Ring All". Select the Music On Hold class for the call queue. Music On Hold Note:
Music On Hold classes can be managed from Web GUI-> PBX->Internal Options->Music On Hold. Configure whether the callers will be disconnected from the queue or not if the queue has no agent anymore. The default setting is "Strict". Yes Callers will be disconnected from the queue if all agents are paused Leave When Empty No or invalid. Never disconnect the callers from the queue when the queue is empty. Strict Callers will be disconnected from the queue if all agents are paused, invalid or unavailable. Configure whether the callers can dial into a call queue if the queue has no agent. The default setting is "No". Yes Callers can always dial into a call queue. Dial in Empty Queue No Callers cannot dial into a queue if all agents are paused or invalid. Strict Callers cannot dial into a queue if the agents are paused, invalid or unavailable. Dynamic Login Password If enabled, the configured PIN number is required for dynamic agent to log in. The default setting is disabled. Ring Time Out Configure the number of seconds an agent will ring before the call goes to the next agent. The default setting is 15 seconds. Wrapup Time Configure the number of seconds before a new call can ring the queue Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 214 of 321 after the last call on the agent is completed. If set to 0, there will be no delay between calls to the queue. The default setting is 15 seconds. Configure the maximum number of calls to be queued at once. This number does not include calls that have been connected with agents. It only includes calls not connected yet. The default setting is 0, which means unlimited. When the maximum value is reached, the caller will be treated with busy tone followed by the next calling rule after attempting to enter the queue. Max Queue Length Report Hold Time the call before the caller is connected to the agent. The default setting is If enabled, the UCM6200 will report (to the agent) the duration of time of
"No". If enabled, users will be disconnected after the configured number of seconds. The default setting is "No". Wait Time Note:
It is recommended to configure "Wait Time" longer than the "Wrapup Time". Auto Record recording files can be accessed in Queue Recordings under web If enabled, the calls on the call queue will be automatically recorded. The Enable Destination destination configured in the next field if none of the agents answers the GUI->PBX->Call Features->Call Queue. If enabled, the incoming call for the call queue will be routed to the call after ringing for a time of Ring Timeout. Configure the global timeout (in seconds) of call queue. It must be bigger Queue Timeout than the value of ring timeout. The call in the queue will be transferred to Failover Destination Enable Feature Codes the failover destination directly if this time is exceeded. Configure the call destination for the call to be routed to if no agent in this call queue answers the call. Enable feature codes option for call queue. For example, *83 is used for Agent Pause Agents Choose from the available users on the left to the static agents list on the Select the available users to be the static agents in the call queue. right. Click on to arrange the order. Click on to delete the call queue. Click on "Agent Login Settings" to configure Agent Login Extension Postfix and Agent Logout Extension Postfix. Once configured, users could log in the call queue as dynamic agent. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 215 of 321 Figure 128: Agent Login Settings For example, if the call queue extension is 6500, Agent Login Extension Postfix is * and Agent Logout Extension Postfix is **, users could dial 6500* to login to the call queue as dynamic agent and dial 6500** to logout from the call queue. Dynamic agent doesn't need to be listed as static agent and can log in/log out at any time. Call queue feature code "Agent Pause" and "Agent Unpause" can be configured under Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Feature Codes. The default feature code is *83 for "Agent Pause"
and *84 for "Agent Unpause". Queue recordings are shown on the Call Queue page. Click on to download the recording file in .wav format; click on to delete the recording file. To delete multiple recording files by one click, select several recording files to be deleted and click on Delete Selected Recording Files or click on Delete All Recording Files to delete all recording files. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 216 of 321 EXTENSION GROUPS The UCM6200 extension group feature allows users to assign and categorize extensions in different groups to better manage the configurations on the UCM6200. For example, when configuring "Enable Filter on Source Caller ID", users could select a group instead of each person's extension to assign. This feature simplifies the configuration process and helps manage and categorize the extensions for business environment. CONFIGURE EXTENSION GROUPS Extension group can be configured via Web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Extension Groups. Click on "Create New Extension Group" to create a new extension group. Click on to edit the extension group. Select extensions from the list on the left side to the right side. Figure 129: Edit Extension Group Click on to delete the extension group. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 217 of 321 USING EXTENSION GROUPS Here is an example where the extension group can be used. Go to Web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Outbound Routes and select "Enable Filter on Source Caller ID". Both single extensions and extension groups will show up for users to select. Figure 130: Select Extension Group in Outbound Route Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 218 of 321 PICKUP GROUPS The UCM6200 supports pickup group feature which allows users to pick up incoming calls for other extensions if they are in the same pickup group, by dialing "Pickup Extension" feature code (by default *8). CONFIGURE PICKUP GROUPS Pickup groups can be configured via Web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Pickup Groups. Click on "Create New Pickup Group" to create a new pickup group. Click on to edit the pickup group. Select extensions from the list on the left side to the right side. Figure 131: Edit Pickup Group Click on to delete the pickup group. CONFIGURE PICKUP FEATURE CODE When picking up the call for the pickup group member, the user only needs to dial the pickup feature code. Its not necessary to add the extension number after the pickup feature code. The pickup feature code is configurable under Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Feature Codes. The default pickup feature code is *8. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 219 of 321 Figure 132: Edit Pickup Feature Code Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 220 of 321 MUSIC ON HOLD Music On Hold settings can be accessed via Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Music On Hold. In this page, users could configure music on hold class and upload music files. The "default" Music On Hold class already has 5 audio files defined for users to use. Click on "Create New MOH Class" to add a new Music On Hold class. Figure 133: Music On Hold Default Class Click on to configure the MOH class sort method to be "Alpha" or "Random" for the sound files. Click on next to the selected Music On Hold class to delete this Music On Hold class. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 221 of 321 Click on to select music file from local PC and click on to start uploading. The music file uploaded has to be 8 KHz Mono format with size smaller than 5M. Click on next to the sound file to delete it from the selected Music On Hold Class. Select the sound files and click on to delete all selected music on hold files.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Note:
Once the MOH file is deleted, there are two ways to recover the music files. Users could download the MOH file from this link:
http://downloads.asterisk.org/pub/telephony/sounds/releases/asterisk-moh-opsound-wav-2.03.tar.gz After downloading and unzip the pack, users could then upload the music files to UCM. Factory reset could also recover the MOH file on the UCM.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------
Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 222 of 321 FAX/T.38 The UCM6200 supports T.30/T.38 Fax and Fax Pass-through. It can convert the received Fax to PDF format and send it to the configured Email address. Fax/T.38 settings can be accessed via Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->FAX/T.38. The list of received Fax files will be displayed in the same web page for users to view, retrieve and delete. CONFIGURE FAX/T.38 Click on "Create New Fax Extension". In the popped up window, fill the extension, name and Email address to send the received Fax to. Click on "Fax Settings" to configure the Fax parameters. Table 69: FAX/T.38 Settings Enable Error Correction Mode Configure to enable Error Correction Mode (ECM) for the Fax. The default setting is "Yes". Maximum Transfer Rate possible values are 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12000 and 14400. The Configure the maximum transfer rate during the Fax rate negotiation. The default setting is 14400. Minimum Transfer Rate possible values are 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12000 and 14000. The Configure the minimum transfer rate during the Fax rate negotiation. The default setting is 2400. Configure the concurrent fax that can be sent by UCM6200. Two mode Only and More are supported. Only Under this mode, the UCM6200 allows only single user to send fax at Max Concurrent Sending Fax a time. More Under this mode, the UCM6200 supports multiple concurrent fax sending by the users. By default, this option is set to only. Fax Queue Length Configure the maximum length of Fax Queue from 6 to 10. The default setting is 6. Configure the Email address to send the received Fax to if user's Email Default Email Address address cannot be found. Note:
Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 223 of 321 The extension's Email address or the Fax's default Email address needs to be configured in order to receive Fax from Email. If neither of them is configured, Fax will be not be received from Email. Fill in the "Subject:" and "Message:" content, to be used in the Email when sending the Fax to the users. The template variables are:
${CALLERIDNUM} : Caller ID Number
${CALLERIDNAME} : Caller ID Name
${RECEIVEEXTEN} : The extension to receive the Fax
${FAXPAGES} : Number of pages in the Fax
${VM_DATE} : The date and time when the Fax is received Template Variables Click on to edit the Fax extension. Click on to delete the Fax extension. SAMPLE CONFIGURATION TO RECEIVE FAX FROM PSTN LINE The following instructions describe how to use the UCM6200 to receive Fax from PSTN line on the Fax machine connected to the UCM6200 FXS port. 1. Connect Fax machine to the UCM6200 FXS port. 2. Connect PSTN line to the UCM6200 FXO port. 3. Go to web GUI->PBX->Analog Trunks page. 4. Create or edit the analog trunk for Fax as below. Fax Mode: Make sure "Fax Mode" option is set to "None". Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 224 of 321 Figure 134: Configure Analog Trunk without Fax Detection 5. Go to UCM6200 web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Extensions page. 6. Create or edit the extension for FXS port. Analog Station: Select FXS port to be assigned to the extension. By default, it's set to "None". Once selected, analog related settings for this extension will show up in "Analog Settings"
section. Figure 135: Configure Extension for Fax Machine: FXS Extension Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 225 of 321 Figure 136: Configure Extension for Fax Machine: Analog Settings 7. Go to web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Inbound Routes page. 8. Create an inbound route to use the Fax analog trunk. Select the created extension for Fax machine in step 4 as the default destination. Figure 137: Configure Inbound Rule for Fax Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 226 of 321 Now the Fax configuration is done. When there is an incoming Fax calling to the PSTN number for the FXO port, it will send the Fax to the Fax machine. SAMPLE CONFIGURATION FOR FAX-TO-EMAIL The following instructions describe a sample configuration on how to use Fax-to-Email feature on the UCM6200. 1. Connect PSTN line to the UCM6200 FXO port. 2. Go to UCM6200 web GUI->Internal Options->Fax/T.38 page. Create a new Fax extension. Figure 138: Create Fax Extension 3. Go to UCM6200 web GUI->Basic/Call Routes->Analog Trunks page. Create a new analog trunk. Please make sure "Fax Detection" is set to "No". 4. Go to UCM6200 web GUI->Basic/Call Routes->Inbound Routes page. Create a new inbound route and set the default destination to the Fax extension. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 227 of 321 Figure 139: Inbound Route to Fax Extension 5. Once successfully configured, the incoming Fax from external Fax machine to the PSTN line number will be converted to PDF file and sent to the Email address Faxtest@ucm6200mycompany.com as attachment. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 228 of 321 ASTERISK MANAGER INTERFACE (RESTRICTED ACCESS) The UCM6200 supports Asterisk Manager Interface (AMI) with restricted access. AMI allows a client program to connect to an Asterisk instance commands or read events over a TCP/IP stream. Its particularly useful when the system admin tries to track the state of a telephony client inside Asterisk. User could configure AMI parameters on UCM6200 web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->AMI. For details on how to use AMI on UCM6200, please refer to the following AMI guide:
http://www.grandstream.com/sites/default/files/Resources/ucm6200_AMI_guide.pdf
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Warning:
Please do not enable AMI on the UCM6200 if it is placed on a public or untrusted network unless you have taken steps to protect the device from unauthorized access. It is crucial to understand that AMI access can allow AMI user to originate calls and the data exchanged via AMI is often very sensitive and private for your UCM6200 system. Please be cautious when enabling AMI access on the UCM6200 and restrict the permission granted to the AMI user. By using AMI on UCM6200 you agree you understand and acknowledge the risks associated with this.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 229 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 230 of 321 BUSY CAMP-ON The UCM6200 supports busy camp-on/call completion feature that allows the PBX to camp on a called party and inform the caller as soon as the called party becomes available given the previous attempted call has failed. The configuration and instructions on how to use busy camp-on/call completion feature can be found in the following guide:
http://www.grandstream.com/sites/default/files/Resources/ucm6200_busy_camp_on_guide.pdf Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 231 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 232 of 321 FOLLOW ME Follow Me is a feature on the UCM6200 that allows users to direct calls to other phone numbers and have them ring all at once or one after the other. Calls can be directed to users home phone, office phone, mobile and etc. The calls will get to the user no matter where they are. Follow Me option can be found under web GUI-> PBX-> Call Features->Follow Me. To configure follow me:
Click on "Create New Follow Me" and then select an extension to be configured with Follow Me. Figure 140: Create Follow Me Click on Next to continue editing Follow Me configuration. Figure 141: Edit Follow Me Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 233 of 321 Click on Add Follow Me Number to add local extensions or external numbers to be called after ringing the extension selected in the first step. Once created, it will be displayed on the follow me web page list. Click on to edit the Follow Me configuration. Click on to delete the Follow Me. The following table shows the Follow Me configuration parameters. Table 70: Follow Me Settings Enable Configure to enable or disable Follow Me for this user. Skip Trunk Auth option is enabled or the Skip Trunk Auth option of the extension is If external number is added in the Follow Me, please make sure this Music On Hold Class Confirm When Answering Enable Destination Default Destination enabled, otherwise the external Follow Me number cannot be reached. Configure the Music On Hold class that the caller would hear while tracking the user. By default it is enabled and user will be asked to press 1 to accept the call or to press 2 to reject the call after answering a Follow Me call. If it is disabled, the Follow Me call will be established once after the user answers it. When enabled, the call will be routed to the default destination if no one in the Follow Me extensions answers the call. Configure the destination if no one in the Follow Me extensions answers the call. The available options are:
Extension Voicemail Queues Ring Group Voicemail Group IVR External Number Follow Me Numbers order. Click on to delete the number. Click on to add new The added numbers are listed here. Click on to arrange the numbers. New Follow Me Number External Number. The selected dial plan should have permissions to dial Add a new Follow Me number which could be a Local Extension or Dialing Order Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 the defined external number. Select the order in which the Follow Me destinations will be dialed to reach the user: ring all at once or ring one after the other. UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 234 of 321 Click on Follow Me Options to enable or disable the options listed in the following table. Table 71: Follow Me Options Playback Incoming Status If enabled, the PBX will playback the incoming status message before Message starting the Follow Me steps. Record the Callers Name If enabled, the PBX will record the callers name from the phone so it can be announced to the callee in each step. Playback Unreachable Status If enabled, the PBX will playback the unreachable status message to the Message caller if the callee cannot be reached. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 235 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 236 of 321 ONE-KEY DIAL The UCM6200 supports One-Key Dial that allows users to call a certain destination by pressing one digit 0 to 9 on the keypad. This creates a system-wide speed dial access for all the extensions on the UCM6200. To enable One-Key Dial, on the UCM6200 web GUI, go to page PBX->Call Features->One-Key Dial. Figure 142: Configure One-Key Dial User should first decide a digit used for One-Key Dial and check the option Enable Destination for the digit. Then select a dial destination from Default Destination. The supported destinations include extension, voicemail, conference room, voicemail group, IVR, ring group, call queue, page group, fax, DISA, Dial by Name and external number. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 237 of 321 Figure 143: One-Key Dial Destinations Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 238 of 321 DISA In many situations the user will find the need to access his own IP PBX resources but he is not physically near one of his extensions. However, he does have access to his own cell phone. In this case we can use what is commonly known as DISA (Direct Inward System Access). Under this scenario the user will be able to call from the outside, whether its using his cell phone, pay phone, regular PSTN, etc. After calling into UCM6200, the user can then dial out via the SIP trunk or PSTN trunk connected to UCM6200 as it is an internal extension. The UCM6200 supports DISA to be used in IVR or inbound route. Before using it, create new DISA under web GUI->Call Features->DISA. Click on "Create New IVR" to add a new DISA. Click on to edit the DISA configuration. Click on to delete the DISA. Figure 144: Create New DISA Table 72: DISA Settings Name Configure DISA name to identify the DISA. Configure the password (digit only) required for the user to enter before Password using DISA to dial out. Note:
The password has to be at least 4 digits. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 239 of 321 Configure the permission level for DISA. The available permissions are
"Internal", "Local", "National" and "International" from the lowest level to the highest level. The default setting is "Internal". If the user tries to dial Permission outbound calls after dialing into the DISA, the UCM6200 will compared the DISA's permission level with the outbound route's privilege level. If the DISA's permission level is higher than (or equal to) the outbound route's privilege level, the call will be allowed to go through. Configure the maximum amount of time the UCM6200 will wait before Response Timeout hanging up if the user dials an incomplete or invalid number. The default setting is 10 seconds. Configure the maximum amount of time permitted between digits when the user is typing the extension. The default setting is 5 seconds. If enabled, during an active call, users can enter the UCM6200 hangup feature code (by default it's *0) to disconnect the call or hang up directly. A new dial tone will be heard shortly for the user to make a new call. The default setting is "No". Digit Timeout Allow Hangup Once successfully created, users can configure the inbound route destination as "DISA" or IVR key event as "DISA". When dialing into DISA, users will be prompted with password first. After entering the correct password, a second dial tone will be heard for the users to dial out. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 240 of 321 CALLBACK FEATURE Callback is mainly designed for users who often use their mobile phones to make long distance or international calls which may have high service charges. The callback feature provides an economic solution for reduce the cost from this. The callback feature works as follows:
1. Configure a new callback on the UCM6200. 2. On the UCM6200, configure destination of the inbound route for analog trunk to callback. 3. Save and apply the settings. 4. The user calls the PSTN number of the UCM6200 using the mobile phone, which goes to callback destination as specified in the inbound route. 5. Once the user hears the ringback tone from the mobile phone, hang up the call on the mobile phone. 6. The UCM6200 will call back the user. 7. The user answers the call. 8. The call will be sent to DISA or IVR which directs the user to dial the destination number. 9. The user will be connected to the destination number. In this way, the calls are placed and connected through trunks on the UCM6200 instead of to the mobile phone directly. Therefore, the user will not be charged on mobile phone services for long distance or international calls. To configure callback on the UCM6200, go to web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Callback page and click on
. Configuration parameters are listed in the following table. Name Configure a name to identify the Callback. Table 73: Callback Configuration Parameters CallerID Pattern Configure the pattern of the callers allowed to use this callback. The caller who places the inbound call needs to have the callerID match this pattern so that the caller can get callback after hanging up the call. Note:
If leaving as blank, all numbers are allowed to use this callback. Configure the prepend digits to be added at before dialing the outside Outbound Prepend number. The number with prepended digits will be used to match the outbound route. - is the connection character which will be ignored. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 241 of 321 Delay Before Callback Configure the number of seconds to be delayed before calling back the user. Configure the destination which the callback will direct the caller to. Two destinations are available:
IVR DISA The caller can then enter the desired number to dial out via UCM6200 trunk. Destination Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 242 of 321 BLF AND EVENT LIST BLF The UCM6200 supports BLF monitoring for extensions, ring group, call queue, conference room and parking lot. For example, on the user's phone, configure the parking lot number 701 as the BLF monitored number. When there is a parked call on 701, the LED for this BLF key will light up in red, meaning a call is parked against this parking lot. Pressing this BLF key can pick up the call from this parking lot.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Note:
On the Grandstream GXP series phones, the MPK supports "Call Park" mode, which can be used to park the call by configuring the MPK number as call park feature code (e.g., 700). MPK "Call Park" mode can also be used to monitor and pickup parked call if the MPK number is configured as parking lot (e.g., 701).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
EVENT LIST Besides BLF, users can also configure the phones to monitor event list. In this way, both local extensions on the same UCM6200 and remote extensions on the VOIP trunk can be monitored. The event list setting is under web GUI->Call Features->Event List. Click on "Create New Event List" to add a new event list. Click on to edit the event list configuration. Click on to delete the event list. Table 74: Event List Settings URI Please note the URI name cannot be the same as the extension name on Configure the name of this event list (for example, office_event_list). Local Extensions Remote Extensions Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 the UCM6200. The valid characters are letters, digits, _ and -. Select the available extensions/Extension Groups listed on the local UCM6200 to be monitored in the event list. If LDAP sync is enabled between the UCM6200 and the peer UCM6200, the remote extensions will be listed under "Available Extensions". If not, UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 243 of 321 manually enter the remote extensions under "Special Extensions" field. Manually enter the remote extensions in the peer/register trunk to be Special Extensions monitored in the event list. Valid format: 5000,5001,9000 Figure 145: Create New Event List Remote extension monitoring works on the UCM6200 via event list BLF, among Peer SIP trunks or Register SIP trunks (register to each other). Therefore, please properly configure SIP trunks on the UCM6200 first before using remote BLF feature. Please note the SIP end points need support event list BLF in order to monitor remote extensions. When an event list is created on the UCM6200 and remote extensions are added to the list, the UCM6200 will send out SIP SUBSCIRBE to the remote UCM6200 to obtain the remote extension status. When the SIP end points registers and subscribes to the local UCM6200 event list, it can obtain the remote extension status from this event list. Once successfully configured, the event list page will show the status of total extension and subscribers for each event list. Users can also select the event URI to check the monitored extension's status and the subscribers' details. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 244 of 321
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Note:
To configure LDAP sync, please go to UCM6200 web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->VoIP Trunk. You will see "Sync LDAP Enable" option. Once enabled, please configure password information for the remote peer UCM6200 to connect to the local UCM6200. Additional information such as port number, LDAP outbound rule, LDAP Dialed Prefix will also be required. Both the local UCM6200 and remote UCM6200 need enable LDAP sync option with the same password for successful connection and synchronization. Currently LDAP sync feature only works between two UCM6200s.
(Theoretically) Remote BLF monitoring will work when the remote PBX being monitored is non-UCM6200 PBX. However, it might not work the other way around depending on whether the non-UCM6200 PBX supports event list BLF or remote monitoring feature.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 245 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 246 of 321 DIAL BY NAME Dial By Name is a feature on the PBX that allows caller to search a person by first or last name via his/her phone's keypad. The administrator can define the Dial By Name directory including the desired extensions in the directory and the searching type by "first name" or "last name". After dialing in, the PBX IVR/Auto Attendant will guide the caller to spell the digits to find the person in the Dial By Name directory. This feature allows customers/clients to use the guided automatic system to get in touch with the enterprise employees without having to know the extension number, which brings convenience and improves business image for the enterprise. DIAL BY NAME CONFIGURATION The administrators can create the dial by name group under web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Dial By Name. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 Figure 146: Create Dial By Name Group UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 247 of 321 1. Group Name Enter the Group Name. This is to identify the Dial By Name group. The Dial By Name group can be used as the destination for inbound route and key pressing event for IVR. The group name defined here will show up in the destination list when configuring IVR and inbound route. If Dial By Name is set as a key pressing event for IVR, user could use * to exit from Dial By Name, then re-enter IVR and start a new event. The following example shows how to use this option. Figure 147: Dial By Name Group In IVR Key Pressing Events Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 248 of 321 Figure 148: Dial By Name Group In Inbound Rule 2. Extension Configure the direct dial extension for the Dial By Name group. 3. Available Extensions/Selected Extensions Select available extensions from the left side to the right side as the directory for the Dial By Name group. Only the selected extensions here can be reached by the Dial By Name IVR when dialing into this group. The extensions here must have a valid first name and last name configured under web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Extensions in order to be searchable in Dial By Name directory through IVR. By specifying the extensions here, the administrators can make sure unscreened calls will not reach the company employee if he/she doesn't want to receive them directly. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 249 of 321 Figure 149: Configure Extension First Name and Last Name 4. Query Type Specify the query type. This defines how the caller will need to enter to search the directory. By First Name: enter the first 3 digits of the first name to search the directory. By Last Name: enter the first 3 digits of the last name to search the directory. By Full Name: enter the first 3 digits of the first name or last name to search the directory. 5. Select Type Specify the select type on the searching result. The IVR will confirm the name/number for the party the caller would like to reach before dialing out. By Order: After the caller enters the digits, the IVR will announce the first matching party's name and number. The caller can confirm and dial out if it's the destination party, or press * to listen to the next matching result if it's not the desired party to call. By Menu: After the caller enters the digits, the IVR will announce 8 matching results. The caller can press number 1 to 8 to select and call, or press 9 for results in next page. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 250 of 321 ACTIVE CALLS AND MONITOR The active calls on the UCM6200 are displayed in web UI->Status->Active Calls page. Users can monitor the status, hang up the call as well as barge in the active calls in real time manner. ACTIVE CALLS STATUS To view the status of active calls, navigate to web GUI->Status->Active Calls. The following figure shows extension 1000 is calling 1001. 1001 is ringing. Figure 150: Status->PBX Status->Active Calls - Ringing The following figure shows the call between 1000 and 1001 is established. Figure 151: Status->PBX Status->Active Calls Call Established Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 251 of 321 In active call web page, click on to refresh the active call status. HANG UP ACTIVE CALLS To hang up an active call, click on icon in the active call dialog. Users can also click on to hang up all active calls. CALL MONITOR During an active call, click on icon and the monitor dialog will pop up. In the Monitor dialog, configure the following to monitor an active call:
Figure 152: Configure to Monitor an Active Call 1. Enter an available extension for Monitors Extension which will be used to monitor the active call. 2. Monitored Extension must be one of the parties in the active call to be monitored. 3. Select spy mode. There are three options in Spy Mode. Listen In Listen mode, the extension monitoring the call can hear both parties in the active call but the audio of the user on this extension will not be heard by either party in the monitored active call. Whisper In Whisper mode, the extension monitoring the call can hear both parties in the active call. The user on this extension can only talk to the selected monitored extension and he/she will not be heard by the other party in the active call. This can be usually used to supervise calls. Barge In Barge mode, the extension monitoring the call can talk to both parties in the active call. The call will be established similar to three-way conference. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 252 of 321 4. Enable or disable Require Confirmation option. If enabled, the confirmation of the invited monitors extension is required before the active call can be monitored. This option can be used to avoid adding participant who has auto-answer configured or call forwarded to voicemail. 5. Click on Add. An INVITE will be sent to the monitors extension. The monitor can answer the call and start monitoring. If Require Confirmation is enabled, the user will be asked to confirm to monitor the call. Another way to monitor active calls is to dial the corresponding feature codes from an extension. Please refer to [Table 75: UCM6200 Feature Codes] and [ENABLE SPY] section for instructions. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 253 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 254 of 321 CALL FEATURES The UCM6200 supports call recording, transfer, call forward, call park and other call features via feature code. This section lists all the feature codes in the UCM6200 and describes how to use the call features. FEATURE CODES Feature Maps Table 75: UCM6200 Feature Codes Default code: #1. Enter the code during active call. After hearing "Transfer", you will hear dial tone. Enter the number to transfer to. Then the user will be disconnected and transfer is completed. Blind Transfer Options Disable Attended Transfer Allow Caller: Enable the feature code on caller side only. Allow Callee: Enable the feature code on callee side only. Allow Both: Enable the feature code on both caller and callee. Default code: *2. Enter the code during active call. After hearing "Transfer", you will hear the dial tone. Enter the number to transfer to and the user will be connected to this number. Hang up the call to complete the attended transfer. Options Disable Allow Caller: Enable the feature code on caller side only. Allow Callee: Enable the feature code on callee side only. Allow Both: Enable the feature code on both caller and callee. Default code: *0. Enter the code during active call. It will disconnect the call. Disconnect Options Disable Allow Caller: Enable the feature code on caller side only. Allow Callee: Enable the feature code on callee side only. Allow Both: Enable the feature code on both caller and callee. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 255 of 321 Default code: #72. Enter the code during active call to park the call. Call Park Options Disable Allow Caller: Enable the feature code on caller side only. Allow Callee: Enable the feature code on callee side only. Allow Both: Enable the feature code on both caller and callee. Default code: *3. Enter the code followed by # or SEND to start recording the audio call and the UCM6200 will mix the streams natively on the fly as the call is in progress. Audio Mix Record Options Disable Allow Caller: Enable the feature code on caller side only. Allow Callee: Enable the feature code on callee side only. Allow Both: Enable the feature code on both caller and callee. DND/Call Forward Do Not Disturb (DND) Activate Default code: *77. Do Not Disturb (DND) Deactivate Default code: *78. Default Code: *90. Call Forward Busy Activate Enter the code and follow the voice prompt. Or enter the code followed by the extension to forward the call. Call Forward Busy Deactivate Default Code: *91. Default Code: *92. Call Forward No Answer Activate Enter the code and follow the voice prompt. Or enter the code followed by the extension to forward the call. Call Forward No Answer Deactivate Call Forward Unconditional Activate Call Forward Unconditional Deactivate Feature Misc Default Code: *93. Default Code: *72. Enter the code and follow the voice prompt. Or enter the code followed by the extension to forward the call. Default Code: *73. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 256 of 321 Feature Code Digits Timeout Configure the maximum interval (in milliseconds) between the Default Setting: 1000. digits input to activate the feature code. Default Extension: 700. Call Park During an active call, initiate blind transfer and then enter this code to park the call. Default Extension: 701-720. Parked Lots These are the extensions where the calls will be parked, i.e., Use Parklot as Extension parking lots that the parked calls can be retrieved. If checked, the parking lot number can be used as extension. The user can transfer the call to the parking lot number to park the call. Please note this parking lot number range might conflict with extension range. Default setting: 300. Parking Timeout (s) This is the timeout allowed for a call to be parked. After the timeout, if the call is not picked up, the extension who parks the Feature Codes call will be called back. Default Code: *98. Voicemail Access Code Enter *98 and follow the voice prompt. Or dial *98 followed by the extension and # to access the entered extension's My Voicemail Agent Pause Agent Unpause voicemail box. Default Code: *97. Press *97 to access the voicemail box. Default Code: *83. Pause the agent in all call queues. Default Code: *84. Unpause the agent in all call queues. Default Code: *81. Paging Prefix To page an extension, enter the code followed by the extension number. Default Code: *80. Intercom Prefix To intercom an extension, enter the code followed by the extension number. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 257 of 321 Blacklist Add To add a number to blacklist for inbound route, dial *40 and Default Code: *40. follow the voice prompt to enter the number. Default Code: *41. Blacklist Remove To remove a number from current blacklist for inbound route, dial *41 and follow the voice prompt to remove the number. Call Pickup on Ringing To pick up a call for any extension xxxx, enter the code followed Default Code: **. Pickup Extension by the extension number xxxx. Default Code: *8. This code is for the pickup group which can be assigned for each extension on the extension configuration page. If there is an incoming call to an extension, the other extensions within the same pickup group can dial *8 directly to pick up the call. Default Code: *
Direct Dial Voicemail Prefix For example, directly dial *5000 will have to call go into the This code is for the user to directly dial or transfer to an extension's voicemail. extension 5000's voicemail. If the user would like to transfer the call to the extension 5000's voicemail, enter *5000 as the transfer target number. Default Code: *11 Call Completion Request This code is for the user who wants to use Call Completion to complete a call. Default Code: *12 Call Completion Cancel This code is for the user who wants to cancel Call Completion request. Enable Spy Check this box to enable spy feature codes. Listen Spy performance. Monitors line will be muted, and neither party will This is the feature code to listen in on a call to monitor Whisper Spy hear from the monitors extension. The default setting is *54. This is the feature code to speak to one side of the call (for example, whisper to employees to help them handle a call). Only one side will be able to hear from the monitors extension. The default setting is *55. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 258 of 321 Barge Spy This is the feature code to join in on the call to assist both parties. The default setting is *56. Enable Inbound Multiple Mode If enabled, user can switch between different inbound route modes with feature code. By default, this option is disabled. Inbound Default Mode This feature code is used to switch inbound route mode to default mode. The default setting is *61. This feature code is used to switch inbound route mode to mode 1. The default setting is *62. Inbound Mode 1 CALL RECORDING The UCM6200 allows users to record audio during the call. If "Auto Record" is turned on for an extension, ring group, call queue or trunk, the call will be automatically recorded when there is established call with it. Otherwise, please follow the instructions below to manually record the call. 1. Make sure the feature code for "Audio Mix Record" is configured and enabled. 2. After establishing the call, enter the "Audio Mix Record" feature code (by default it's *3) followed by #
or SEND to start recording. 3. To stop the recording, enter the "Audio Mix Record" feature code (by default it's *3) followed by # or SEND again. Or the recording will be stopped once the call hangs up. 4. The recording file can be retrieved under Web GUI->Status->CDR. Click on to play the recording or click on to download the recording file. Figure 153: Download Recording File from CDR Page Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 259 of 321 The above recorded call's recording files are also listed under the UCM6200 web GUI->CDR->Recording Files. CALL PARK Figure 154: Download Recording File from Recording Files Page The UCM6200 provides call park and call pickup features via feature code. PARK A CALL There are two feature codes that can be used to park the call. Feature Maps->Call Park (Default code #72) During an active call, press #72 and the call will be parked. Parking lot number (default range 701 to 720) will be announced after parking the call. Feature Misc->Call Park (Default code 700) During an active call, initiate blind transfer (default code #1) and then dial 700 to park the call. Parking lot number (default range 701 to 720) will be announced after parking the call. RETRIEVE THE PARKED CALL To retrieve the parked call, simply dial the parking lot number and the call will be established. If a parked call is not retrieved after the timeout, the original extension who parks the call will be called back. ENABLE SPY If Enable Spy option is enabled, feature codes for Listen Spy, Whisper Spy and Barge Spy are available for users to dial from any extension to perform the corresponding actions. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 260 of 321 Assume a call is on-going between extension A and extension B, user could dial the feature code from extension C to listen on their call (*54 by default), whisper to one side (*55 by default), or barge into the call
(*56 by default). Then the user will be asked to enter the number to call, which should be either side of the active call, extension A or B in this example.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Caution:
Enable Spy allows any user to listen to any call by feature codes. This may result in the leakage of user privacy.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 261 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 262 of 321 INTERNAL OPTIONS This section describes internal options that haven't been mentioned in previous sections yet. The settings in this section can be applied globally to the UCM6200, including general configurations, jitter buffer, RTP settings, ports config and STUN monitor. The options can be accessed via Web GUI->PBX->Internal Options-> General. INTERNAL OPTIONS/GENERAL Table 76: Internal Options/General General Preferences Global OutBound CID CallerID is defined with higher priority. If no CallerID is defined for Configure the global CallerID used for all outbound calls when no other extension or trunk, the global outbound CID will be used as CallerID. Configure the global CallerID Name used for all outbound calls. If Global OutBound CID Name configured, all outbound calls will have the CallerID Name set to this Operator Extension exit voicemail application. The operator extension can also be used in name. If not, the extension's CallerID Name will be used. Specify the operator extension, which will be dialed when users press 0 to IVR option. Configure the number of seconds to ring an extension before the call goes to the user's voicemail box. The default setting is 60. Ring Timeout Note:
This is the global value used for each extension if "Ring Timeout" field is left empty on the extension configuration page. Call Duration Limit Configure the maximum duration of call-blocking. Record Prompt stopped. For example, before recording, the UCM6200 will play voice If enabled, users will hear voice prompt before recording is started or prompt "The call will be recorded". The default setting is "No". Extension Preferences If enabled, strong password will be enforced for the password created on the UCM6200. The default setting is enabled. Enforce Strong Passwords Strong Password Rules:
1. Password for voicemail, voicemail group, outbound route, DISA, call queue and conference requires non-repetitive and non-sequential Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 263 of 321 digits, with a minimum length of 4 digits. Repetitive digits pattern
(such as 0000, 1111, 1234, 2345, and etc), or common digits pattern
(such as 111222, 321321 and etc) are not allowed to be configured as password. 2. Password for extension registration, web GUI admin login, LDAP and LDAP sync requires alphanumeric characters containing at least two categories of the following, with a minimum length of 4 characters. Numeric digits Lowercase alphabet characters Uppercase alphabet characters Special characters Enable Random Password created. The default setting is "Yes". It is recommended to enable it for If enabled, random password will be generated when the extension is security purpose. Enable Auto Email To User If enabled, UCM6200 will send Email notification to user automatically after editing extension settings or adding a new extension. If set to
"Yes", users could disable the extension range pre-configured/configured on the UCM6200. The default setting is "No". Disable Extension Range Note:
It is recommended to keep the system assignment to avoid inappropriate usage and unnecessary issues. The default extension range assignment is:
User Extensions: 1000-6299 User Extensions is referring to the extensions created under web UI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Extensions page. Pick Extensions: 4000-4999 Extension Ranges device when being provisioned by the UCM6200. There are two This refers to the extensions that can be manually picked from end related options in zero config page->Auto Provision Settings, "Pick Extension Segment" and "Enable Pick Extension". If "Enable Pick Extension" under zero config settings is selected, the extension list defined in "Pick Extension Segment" will be sent out to the device after receiving the device's request. This "Pick Extension Segment"
should be a subset of the "Pick Extensions" range here. This feature is for the GXP series phones that support selecting extension to be provisioned via phone's LCD. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 264 of 321 Auto Provision Extensions: 5000-6299 This sets the range for "Zero Config Extension Segment" which is the extensions can be assigned on the UCM6200 to provision the end device. Conference Extensions: 6300-6399 Ring Group Extensions: 6400-6499 Queue Extensions: 6500-6599 Voicemail Group Extensions: 6600-6699 IVR Extensions: 7000-7100 Dial By Name Extensions: 7101-7199 Fax Extensions: 7200-8200 INTERNAL OPTIONS/JITTER BUFFER SIP Jitter Buffer Enable Jitter Buffer Table 77: Internal Options/Jitter Buffer Select to enable jitter buffer on the sending side of the SIP channel. The default setting is "No". Configure the time (in ms) to buffer. This is the jitter buffer size used in Jitter Buffer Size
"Fixed" jitter buffer, or used as the initial time for "adaptive" jitter buffer. The default setting is 100. Max Jitter Buffer implementation, or used as the jitter buffer size for "Fixed" jitter buffer Configure the maximum time (in ms) to buffer for "Adaptive" jitter buffer implementation. The default setting is 200. Configure the jitter buffer implementation on the sending side of a SIP channel. The default setting is "Fixed". Fixed Implementation The size is always equal to the value of "Max Jitter Buffer". Adaptive The size is adjusted automatically and the maximum value equals to the value of "Max Jitter Buffer". Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 265 of 321 INTERNAL OPTIONS/RTP SETTINGS Table 78: Internal Options/RTP Settings RTP Start RTP End Configure the RTP port starting number. The default setting is 10000. Configure the RTP port ending address. The default setting is 20000. Strict RTP packets that do not come from the source of the RTP stream will be Configure to enable or disable strict RTP protection. If enabled, RTP dropped. The default setting is "Disable". RTP Checksums Configure to enable or disable RTP Checksums on RTP traffic. The default setting is "Disable". Configure whether to support ICE. The default setting is enabled. ICE is the integrated use of STUN and TURN structure to provide reliable VoIP or video calls and media transmission, via a SIP request/ response model or multiple candidate endpoints exchanging IP addresses and ports, such as private addresses and TURN server address. Configure STUN server address. STUN protocol is a Client/Server and also a Request/Response protocol. Its used to check the connectivity between the two terminals, such as maintaining a NAT binding entries keep-alive agreement. The default STUN Server is stun.ipvideotalk.com. Valid format:
[(hostname | IP-address) [':' port]
The default port number is 3478 if not specified. ICE Support STUN Server INTERNAL OPTIONS/PAYLOAD The UCM6200 payload type for audio codecs and video codes can be configured here. AAL2-G.726 Table 79: Internal Options/Payload Configure payload type for ADPCM (G.726, 32kbps, AAL2 codeword packing). The default setting is 112. DTMF Configured payload type for DTMF. The default setting is 101. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 266 of 321 G.721 Compatible Configure to enable/disable G.721 compatible. The default setting is Yes. G.726 iLBC H.264 H.263P VP8 Configure the payload type for G.726 if "G.721 Compatible" is disabled. The default setting is 111. Configure the payload type for iLBC. The default setting is 97. Configure the payload type for H.264. The default setting is 99. Configure the payload type for H.263+. The default setting is 100 103. Configure the payload type for VP8. The default settings is 108. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 267 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 268 of 321 IAX SETTINGS The UCM6200 IAX global settings can be accessed via Web GUI->PBX->IAX Settings. IAX SETTINGS/GENERAL Bind Port Bind Address Table 80: IAX Settings/General Configure the port number that the IAX2 will be allowed to listen to. The default setting is 4569. Configure the address that the IAX2 will be forced to bind to. The default setting is 0.0.0.0, which means all addresses. IAX1 Compatibility Select to configure IAX1 compatibility. The default setting is "No". No Checksums calculated/checked on systems supporting this features. The default If selected, UDP checksums will be disabled and no checksums will be setting is "No". Delay Reject If enabled, the IAX2 will delay the rejection of calls to avoid DOS. The default setting is "No". ADSI Select to enable ADSI phone compatibility. The default setting is "No". Music On Hold Interpret Music On Hold Suggest Bandwidth Specify which Music On Hold class this channel would like to listen to when being put on hold. This music class is only effective if this channel has no music class configured and the bridged channel putting the call on hold has no "Music On Hold Suggest" setting. Specify which Music On Hold class to suggest to the bridged channel when putting the call on hold. Configure the bandwidth for IAX settings. The default setting is "Low". IAX SETTINGS/REGISTRATION Table 81: IAX Settings/Registration IAX Registration Options Min Reg Expire Max Reg Expire Configure the minimum period (in seconds) of registration. The default setting is 60. Configure the maximum period (in seconds) of registration. The default setting is 3600. IAX Thread Count Configure the number of IAX helper threads. The default setting is 10. IAX Max Thread Count Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 Configure the maximum number of IAX threads allowed. The default setting is 100. UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 269 of 321 Auto Kill message is not received within 2000ms. Users could also specify number If set to "yes", the connection will be terminated if ACK for the NEW Authentication Debugging
(in milliseconds) in addition to "yes" and "no". The default setting is "yes". If enabled, authentication traffic in debugging will not show. The default setting is "No". Configure codec negotiation priority. The default setting is "Reqonly". Caller Consider the callers preferred order ahead of the host's. Host Consider the host's preferred order ahead of the caller's. Codec Priority Disabled Disable the consideration of codec preference all together. Reqonly This is almost the same as "Disabled", except when the requested format is not available. The call will only be accepted if the requested format is available. Type of Service Configure ToS bit for preferred IP routing. IAX Trunk Options Trunk Frequency Trunk Time Stamps Configure the frequency of trunk frames (in milliseconds). The default setting is 20. If enabled, time stamps will be attached to trunk frames. The default setting is "No". IAX SETTINGS/STATIC DEFENSE Table 82: IAX Settings/Static Defense Call Token Optional Enter a single IP address (e.g., 11.11.11.11) or a range of IP addresses
(11.11.11.11/22.22.22.22) for which call token validation is not required. Max Call Numbers Configure the maximum number of calls allowed for a single IP address. Max Unvalidated Call Numbers Configure the maximum number of unvalidated calls for all IP addresses. Call Number Limits Configure to limit the number of calls for a give IP address of IP range. IP or IP Range Enter the IP address (11.11.11.11) or a range of IP addresses
(11.11.11.11/22.22.22.22) to be considered for call number limits. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 270 of 321 SIP SETTINGS The UCM6200 SIP global settings can be accessed via Web GUI->PBX->SIP Settings. SIP SETTINGS/GENERAL Table 83: SIP Settings/General Realm For Digest Authentication Configure the host name or domain name for the UCM6200. Realms MUST be globally unique according to RFC3261. The default setting is Grandstream. Bind UDP Port Configure the UDP port used for SIP. The default setting is 5060. Bind IP Address Configure the IP address to bind to. The default setting is 0.0.0.0, which means binding to all addresses. If enabled, the UCM6200 allows unauthorized INVITE coming into the PBX and the call can be made. The default setting is "No". Allow Guest Calls Warning:
Allow Transfer Please be aware of the potential security risk when enabling "Allow Guest Calls" as this will allow any user with the UCM6200 address to dial into the UCM6200. If set to "No", all transfers initiated by the endpoint in the UCM6200 will be disabled (unless enabled in peers or users). The default setting is "Yes". When sending MWI NOTIFY requests, this value will be used in the MWI From
"From:" header as the "name" field. If no "From User" is configured, the
"user" field of the URI in the "From:" header will be filled with this value. SIP SETTINGS/MISC Outbound SIP Registrations Table 84: SIP Settings/Misc Register Timeout Configure the register retry timeout (in seconds). The default setting is 20. Register Attempts up. The default setting is 0, which means the UCM6200 will keep trying Configure the number of registration attempts before the UCM6200 gives until the server side accepts the registration request. Video Max Bit Rate (kb/s) Configure the maximum bit rate (in kb/s) for video calls. The default setting is 384. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 271 of 321 Support SIP Video Select to enable video support in SIP calls. The default setting is "Yes". If enabled, when rejecting an incoming INVITE or REGISTER request, the UCM6200 will always reject with "401 Unauthorized" instead of notifying Reject Non-Matching INVITE the requester whether there is a matching user or peer for the request. This reduces the ability of an attacker to scan for valid SIP usernames. The default setting is "No". SIP SETTINGS/SESSION TIMER Table 85: SIP Settings/Session Timer Select the session timer mode. The default setting is "Accept". The options are:
Originate Session Timers Always request and run session timer. Accept Run session timer only when requested by other UA. Refuse Do not run session timer. Configure the maximum session refresh interval (in seconds). The default setting is 1800. Configure the minimum session refresh interval (in seconds). The default setting is 90. Select the session refresher to be UAC or UAS. The default setting is UAC. Session Expire Min SE Session Refresher SIP SETTINGS/TCP AND TLS TCP Enable Table 86: SIP Settings/TCP and TLS Configure to allow incoming TCP connections with the UCM6200. The default setting is "No". Configure the IP address for TCP server to bind to. 0.0.0.0 means binding TCP Bind Address to all interfaces. The port number is optional. If not specified, 5060 will be TLS Enable used. Configure to allow incoming TLS connections with the UCM6200. The default setting is "No". Configure the IP address for TLS server to bind to. 0.0.0.0 means binding TLS Bind Address to all interfaces. The port number is optional. If not specified, 5061 will be used. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 272 of 321 Note:
The IP address must match the common name (hostname) in the certificate. Please do not bind a TLS socket to multiple IP addresses. For details on how to construct a certificate for SIP, please refer to the following document:
http://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-sip-domain-certs Select the TLS protocol for outbound client connections. The default setting is TLSv1. If enabled, the TLS server's certificate won't be verified when acting as a client. The default setting is "Yes". This is the CA certificate if the TLS server being connected to requires self-signed certificate, including server's public key. This file will be renames as "TLS.ca" automatically. Note:
The size of the uploaded ca file must be under 2MB. This is the Certificate file (*.pem format only) used for TLS connections. It contains private key for client and signed certificate for the server. This file will be renamed as "TLS.pem" automatically. Note:
The size of the uploaded certificate file must be under 2MB. This file must be named with the CA subject name hash value. It contains CA's (Certificate Authority) public key, which is used to verify the accessed servers. Note:
TLS Client Protocol TLS Do Not Verify TLS Self-Signed CA TLS Cert TLS CA Cert TLS CA List Display a list of files under the CA Cert directory. The size of the uploaded CA certificate file must be under 2MB. SIP SETTINGS/NAT Table 87: SIP Settings/NAT External Host messages if the UCM6200 is behind NAT. If it is a host name, it will only Configure a static IP address and port (optional) used in outbound SIP be looked up once. Use IP address in SDP If enabled, the SDP connection will use the IP address resolved from the external host. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 273 of 321 External TCP Port External TLS Port Local Network Address SIP SETTINGS/TOS ToS For SIP ToS For RTP Audio ToS For RTP Video Configure the externally mapped TCP port when the UCM6200 is behind a static NAT or PAT. Configures the externally mapped TLS port when UCM6200 is behind a static NAT or PAT. Specify a list of network addresses that are considered inside of the NAT network. Multiple entries are allowed. If not configured, the external IP address will not be set correctly. A sample configuration could be as follows:
192.168.0.0/16 Table 88: SIP Settings/ToS Configure the Type of Service for SIP packets. The default setting is None. Configure the Type of Service for RTP audio packets. The default setting is None. Configure the Type of Service for RTP video packets. The default setting is None. Default Incoming/Outgoing Configure the default duration (in seconds) of incoming/outgoing Registration Time registration. The default setting is 120. Max Registration/Subscription Configure the maximum duration (in seconds) of incoming registration Time and subscription allowed by the UCM6200. The default setting is 3600. Min Registration/Subscription Configure the minimum duration (in seconds) of incoming registration and Time subscription allowed by the UCM6200. The default setting is 60. Enable Relaxed DTMF Select to enable relaxed DTMF handling. The default setting is "No". DTMF Mode 64-kbit codec PCMU and PCMA are required. When "Auto" is selected, Select DTMF mode to send DTMF. The default setting is RFC2833. If
"Info" is selected, SIP INFO message will be used. If "Inband" is selected,
"RFC2833" will be used if offered, otherwise "Inband" will be used. The default setting is "RFC2833". During an active call, if there is no RTP activity within the timeout (in seconds), the call will be terminated. The default setting is no timeout. RTP Timeout Note:
This setting doesn't apply to calls on hold. RTP Hold Timeout When the call is on hold, if there is no RTP activity within the timeout (in seconds), the call will be terminated. This value of RTP Hold Timeout Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 274 of 321 Trust Remote Party ID Send Remote Party ID should be larger than RTP Timeout. The default setting is no timeout. Configure whether the Remote-Party-ID should be trusted. The default setting is "No". Configure whether the Remote-Party-ID should be sent or not. The default setting is "No". Configure whether the UCM6200 should generate inband ringing or not. The default setting is "Never". Yes: The UCM6200 will send 180 Ringing followed by 183 Session Progress and in-band audio. Generate In-Band Ringing No: The UCM6200 will send 180 Ringing if 183 Session Progress has not been sent yet. If audio path is established already with 183 then send in-band ringing. Never: Whenever ringing occurs, the UCM6200 will send 180 Ringing as long as 200OK has not been set yet. Inband ringing will not be generated even the end point device is not working properly. Server User Agent Configure the user agent string for the UCM6200. Send Compact SIP Headers If enabled, compact SIP headers will be sent. The default setting is "No". 100rel Configure the 100rel setting on UCM6200. The default setting is Yes. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 275 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 276 of 321 PORTS CONFIG The analog hardware (FXS port and FXO port) on the UCM6200 will be listed in this page. Click on to edit signaling preference for FXS port or configure ACIM settings for FXO port. Select "Loop Start" or "Kewl Start" for each FXS port. And then click on "Update" to save the change. Figure 155: FXS Ports Signaling Preference For FXO port, users could manually enter the ACIM settings by selecting the value from dropdown list for each port. Or users could click on "Detect" for the UCM6200 to automatically detect the ACIM value. The detecting value will be automatically filled into the settings. Figure 156: FXO Ports ACIM Settings Table 89: Internal Options/Ports Config Tone Region and etc to be sent from the FXS port. The default setting is "United States Select country to set the default tones for dial tone, busy tone, ring tone Advanced Settings of America (USA)". FXO Opermode Select country to set the On Hook Speed, Ringer Impedance, Ringer Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 277 of 321 Threshold, Current Limiting, TIP/RING voltage adjustment, Minimum Operational Loop Current, and AC Impedance as predefined for your country's analog line characteristics. The default setting is "United States of America (USA)". Select country to set the On Hook Speed, Ringer Impedance, Ringer Threshold, Current Limiting, TIP/RING voltage adjustment, Minimum FXS Opermode Operational Loop Current, and AC Impedance as predefined for your country's analog line characteristics. The default setting is "United States of America (USA)". Configure to enable or disable override Two-Wire Impedance Synthesis
(TISS). The default setting is No. FXS TISS Override PCMA Override If enabled, users can select the impedance value for Two-Wire Impedance Synthesis (TISS) override. The default setting is 600. Select the codec to be used for analog lines. North American users should choose PCMU. All other countries, unless already known, should be assumed to be PCMA. The default setting is PCMU. Note:
Boost Ringer voltage (89V) for analog phones attached to the FXS port is required. The This option requires system reboot to take effect. Configure whether normal ringing voltage (40V) or maximum ringing Fast Ringer Low Power default setting is "Normal". Configure to increase the ringing speed to 25HZ. This option can be used with "Low Power" option. The default setting is "Normal". Configure the peak voltage up to 50V during "Fast Ringer" operation. This option is used with "Fast Ringer". The default setting is "Normal". If set to "Full Wave", false ring detection will be prevented for lines where Ring Detect Caller ID is sent before the first ring and proceeded by a polarity reversal, as in UK. The default setting is "Standard". Configure the type of Message Waiting Indicator on FXS lines. The FXS MWI Mode default setting is "FSK". FSK: Frequency Shift Key Indicator NEON: Light Neon Bulb Indicator. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 278 of 321 VALUE-ADDED FEATURES FAX SENDING The UCM6200 supports sending Fax via web UI access. This feature can be found on web UI->PBX->Value-added Features->Fax Sending page. In order to send fax, pre-setup for analog trunk and outbound route is required. Please refer to [ANALOG TRUNKS], [VOIP TRUNKS] and [OUTBOUND ROUTES] sections for configuring analog trunk and outbound route. After making sure analog trunk or VoIP Trunk is setup properly and UCM6200 can reach out to PSTN numbers via the trunk, on Fax Sending page, enter the fax number and upload the file to be faxed. Then click on Send to start. The progress of sending fax will be displayed in web UI. Users can also view the sending history is in the same web page. Figure 157: Fax Sending in Web UI ANNOUNCEMENTS CENTER The UCM6200 supports Announcements Center feature which allows users to pre-record and store voice message into UCM6200 with a specified code. The users can also create group with specified extensions. When the code and the group number are dialed together in the combination of code + group number, the specified voice message is sent to all group members and only extensions in the group will hear the voice message. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 279 of 321 Figure 158: Announcements Center ANNOUNCEMENTS CENTER SETTINGS Name Code Table 90: Announcements Center Settings Configure a name for the newly created Announcements Center to identify this announcement center. Enter a code number for the custom prompt. This code will be used in combination with the group number. For example, if the code is 55, and group number is 666. The user can dial 55666 to send prompt 55 to all members in group 666. Note:
The combination number must not conflict with any number in the system such as extension number or conference number. This option is to set a custom prompt as an announcement to notify group Custom Prompt members. The file can be uploaded from page Custom Prompt. Click Prompt to add additional record. Configure the ring timeout for the group members. The default value is 30 seconds. Ring Timeout GROUP SETTINGS Name Configure a name for the newly created group to identify the group. Table 91: Group Settings Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 280 of 321 Configure the group number. The group number is used in combination with the code. For example, if group number is 666, and code is 55. The user can dial 55666 to send prompt 55 to all members in group 666. Note:
The combination number must not conflict with any number in the system such as extension number or conference number. Number Announcements Center feature can be found under web UI->PBX->Value-added Features->
Announcements Center. The following example demonstrates the usage of this feature. 1. Click to create new group. 2. Give a name to the newly created group. 3. Create a group number which is used with code to send voice message. 4. Select the extensions to be included in the group, who will receive the voice message. Figure 159: Announcements Center Group Configuration In this example, group Test has number 666. Extension 1000, 1001 and 1002 are in this group. 5. Click to create a new Announcement Center. 6. Give a name to the newly created Announcement Center. 7. Specify the code which will be used with group number to send the voice message to. 8. Select the message that will be used by the code from the Custom Prompt drop down menu. To create Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 281 of 321 a new Prompt, please click Prompt link and follow the instructions in that page. Figure 160: Announcements Center Code Configuration Code and Group number are used together to direct specified message to the target group. All extensions in the group will receive the message. For example, we can send code 55 to group 666 by dialing 55666 from any extension registered to the UCM6200. All the members in group 666 which are extension 1000, 1001 and 1002 will receive this voice message after they pick up the call. Figure 161: Announcements Center Example Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 282 of 321 STATUS AND REPORTING PBX STATUS The UCM6200 monitors the status for Trunks, Extensions, Queues, Conference Rooms, Interfaces and Parking lot. It presents administrators the real time status in different sections under web GUI->Status->PBX Status. TRUNKS Figure 162: Status->PBX Status Users could see all the configured trunk status in this section. Figure 163: Trunk Status Table 92: Trunk Status Status Display trunk status. Analog trunk status:
Available Busy Unavailable Unknown Error SIP Peer trunk status:
Unreachable: The hostname cannot be reached. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 283 of 321 Unmonitored: QUALIFY feature is not turned on to be monitored. Reachable: The hostname can be reached. SIP Register trunk status:
Registered Unrecognized Trunk Trunks Display trunk name Type Display trunk Type:
Analog SIP IAX Username Display username for this trunk. Port/Hostname/IP Display Port for analog trunk, or Hostname/IP for VoIP (SIP/IAX) trunk. Other operations are also available in trunk status section:
Click on "Trunks", the web page will redirect to trunk configuration page which can also be accessed via web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Analog Trunks. Click on to refresh the trunk status. Click on [ + ] to expand the status detail table. Click on [ - ] to hide the status detail table. EXTENSIONS Users could see all the configured extension status in this section. Figure 164: Extension Status Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 284 of 321 Table 93: Extension Status Display extension number (including feature code). The color indicator has the Status following definitions. Green: Free Blue: Ringing Yellow: In Use Grey: Unavailable Extension Display the extension number. Name/Label First name and last name of the extension. Display message status for the extension. Example: 2/4/1 Description: There are 2 urgent messages, 4 messages in total and 1 message that has been already read. Displays extension type. SIP User IAX User Analog User Ring Groups Voicemail Groups Message Type Other operations are also available in extension status section:
Click on "Extensions", the web page will redirect to extension configuration page which can also be accessed via web GUI->PBX->Basic/Call Routes->Extensions. Click on to refresh the extension status. Click on one of the tabs the corresponding extensions accordingly. Click on [ + ] to expand the status detail table. Click on [ - ] to hide the status detail table. QUEUES to display Users could see all the configured call queue status in this section. The following figure shows the call queue 6500 being in used. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 285 of 321 Figure 165: Queue Status The current call status
(caller ID, duration), agent status, service level, calls summary
(completed/abandoned) are shown for the call queue. The agent status is defined as below. Table 94: Agent Status The agent is available/idle. The agent is ringing. The agent is talking/busy. The agent has been logged out. On the UCM6200, Service Level is defined as the percentage of high-quality calls over all calls in the call queue, where high-quality call means calls answered within 10 seconds. Other operations are also available in queue status section:
Click on "Queues", the web page will redirect to call queue configuration page which can also be accessed via web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Call Queue. Click on to refresh the call queue status. Click on [ + ] to expand the call queue detail. Click on [ - ] to hide the call queue detail. CONFERENCE ROOMS Users could see all the conference room status in this section. It shows all the configured conference rooms, current users, call duration for each user and conference call. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 286 of 321 Figure 166: Conference Room Status Other operations are also available in conference room status section:
Click on "Conference Rooms", the web page will redirect to conference room configuration page which can also be accessed via web GUI->PBX->Call Features->Conference. Click on to refresh the conference room status. Click on [ + ] to expand the conference room details. Click on [ - ] to hide the conference room details. INTERFACES STATUS This section displays interface/port connection status on the UCM6200. The following example shows the interface status for UCM6204 with USB, WAN port, FXS1, FXS2 and FXO1 connected. Figure 167: UCM6204 Interfaces Status Table 95: Interface Status Indicators USB connected. USB disconnected. SD Card connected. SD Card disconnected. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 287 of 321 LAN/WAN connected. LAN/WAN not configured. LAN/WAN disconnected. FXS/FXO connected. FXS/FXO waiting. FXS/FXO busy. FXS/FXO not configured. FXS/FXO disconnected. Other operations are also available in interface status section:
Click on "Interfaces Status", the web page will redirect to ports configuration page which can also be accessed via web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Ports Config. Click on to refresh the interface status. Click on [ + ] to expand the interface details. Click on [ - ] to hide the interface details. PARKING LOT The UCM6200 supports call park using feature code. When there is call being parked, this section will display the parking lot status. Figure 168: Parking Lot Status Table 96: Parking Lot Status Caller ID Channel Display the caller ID who parks the call. Display channel for the call park. Extension Display the parking lot number where the call is parked/retrieved. Timeout Display timeout (in seconds) for the parked call. The status page will dynamically update this timer from 120 seconds (default) to 0. When the timer Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 288 of 321 reaches 0, the caller who parks the call will be called back. Other operations are also available in parking lot status section:
Click on "Parking Lot", the web page will redirect to feature codes page which can also be accessed via web GUI->PBX->Internal Options->Feature Codes. Click on to refresh the parking lot status. Click on [ + ] to expand the parking lot details. Click on [ - ] to hide the parking details. SYSTEM STATUS The UCM6200 system status can be accessed via Web GUI->Status->System Status, which displays the following system information. General Network Storage Usage Resource Usage GENERAL Under Web GUI->Status->System Status->General, users could check the hardware and software information for the UCM6200. Please see details in the following table. Table 97: System Status->General Status ->System Status -> General Model Product model. Part Number Product part number. System Time Current system time. The current system time is also available on the upper right of each web page. Up Time System up time since the last reboot. Boot Core Base Boot version. Core version. Base version. Program Program version. This is the main software release version. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 289 of 321 Recovery Recovery version. NETWORK Under Web GUI->Status->System Status->Network, users could check the network information for the UCM6200. Please see details in the following table. Table 98: System Status->Network Status -> System Status -> Network MAC Address Global unique ID of device, in HEX format. The MAC address can be found on the label coming with original box and on the label located on the bottom of the device. IP Address IP address. Gateway Default gateway address. Subnet Mask Subnet mask address. DNS Server DNS Server address. STORAGE USAGE Users could access the storage usage information from web UI->Status->System Status->Storage Usage. It shows the available and used space for the following partitions. Configuration partition This partition contains PBX system configuration files and service configuration files. Data partition Voicemail, recording files, IVR file, Music on Hold files and etc. USB disk USB disk will display if connected. SD Card SD Card will display if connected. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 290 of 321 Figure 169: System Status->Storage Usage RESOURCE USAGE When configuring and managing the UCM6200, users could access resource usage information to estimate the current usage and allocate the resources accordingly. Under web UI->Status->System Status->Resource Usage, the current CPU usage and Memory usage are shown in the pie chart. Figure 170: System Status->Resource Usage Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 291 of 321 SYSTEM EVENTS The UCM6200 can monitor important system events, log the alerts and send Email notifications to the system administrator. ALERT EVENTS LIST The system alert events list can be found under Web GUI->Status->System Events->Alert Events List. The following event are currently supported on the UCM6200 which will have alert and/or Email generated if occurred:
Disk Usage Modify Admin Password Memory Usage System Reboot System Update System Crash Register SIP Failed Register SIP Trunk Failed Restore Config User Login Success User Login Failed SIP Internal Call Failure SIP Outgoing Call through Trunk Failure Fail2ban Blocking SIP Lost Registration SIP Peer Trunk Status Click on to configure the parameters for each event. See examples below. 1. Disk Usage. Figure 171: System Events->Alert Events Lists: Disk Usage Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 292 of 321 Detect Cycle: The UCM6200 will perform the internal disk usage detection based on this cycle. Users can enter the number and then select second(s)/minute(s)/hour(s)/day(s) to configure the cycle. Alert Threshold: If the detected value exceeds the threshold (in percentage), the UCM6200 system will send the alert. 2. Memory Usage Figure 172: System Events->Alert Events Lists: Memory Usage Detect Cycle: The UCM6200 will perform the memory usage detection based on this cycle. Users can enter the number and then select second(s)/minute(s)/hour(s)/day(s) to configure the cycle. Alert Threshold: If the detected value exceeds the threshold (in percentage), the UCM6200 system will send the alert. 3. System Reboot Figure 173: System Events->Alert Events Lists: System Reboot Detect Cycle: The UCM6200 will check the system reboot based on this cycle. Users can enter the number and then select second(s)/minute(s)/hour(s)/day(s) to configure the cycle. 4. System Crash Figure 174: System Events->Alert Events Lists: System Crash UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 293 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 Detect Cycle: The UCM will detect the event at each cycle based on the specified time. Users can enter the number and then select second(s)/minute(s)/hour(s)/day(s) to configure the cycle. Click on the switch to turn on/off the alert and Email notification for the event. Users could also select the checkbox for each event and then click on button "Alert On", "Alert Off", "Email Notification On", "Email Notification Off" to control the alert and Email notification configuration. ALERT LOG Under Web GUI->Status->System Events->Alert Log, system messages from triggered system events are listed as alert logs. The following screenshot shows system crash alert logs. Figure 175: System Events->Alert Log User could also filter alert logs by selecting a certain event category, type of alert log, and/or specifying a certain time period. The matching results will be displayed after clicking on
. Alert logs are classified into two types by the system:
1. Generate Alert: Generated when alert events happen, for example, alert logs for disk usage exceeding the alert threshold. 2. Restore to Normal: Generated when alert events being cleared, for example, logs for disk usage dropping back below the alert threshold. User could filter out alert logs of Generate Alert or Restore to Normal by specifying the type according to need. The following figure shows an example of filtering out alert logs of type of Restore to Normal. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 294 of 321 Figure 176: Filter for Alert Log ALERT CONTACT Users could add administrator's Email address under Web GUI->Status->System Events->Alert Contact to send the alert notification to. Up to 10 Email addresses can be added. CDR A Call Detail Record (CDR) is a data record produced by telephone exchange activities or other telecommunications equipment documenting the details of a phone call that passed through the PBX. The CDR is composed of the following data fields on the UCM6200. Start Time. Format: 2016-02-27 16:47:03. Call From. Format: "John Doe"<6012>. Call To. Format: 6005. Answered By. Format: 6005. Call Time. Format: 0:00:10. Talk Time. Format: 0:00:10 Status. Format: NO ANSWER, BUSY, ANSWERED, or FAILED. Options. Voice record playing/downloading/deleting. Users could filter the call report by specifying the date range and criteria, depending on how the users would like to include the logs to the report. Then click on "View Report" button to display the generated report. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 295 of 321 Figure 177: CDR Filter Table 99: CDR Filter Criteria Inbound calls Inbound calls are calls originated from a non-internal source (like a VoIP trunk) and sent to an internal extension. Outbound calls Outbound calls are calls sent to a non-internal source (like a VoIP trunk) from an internal extension. Internal calls Internal calls are calls from one internal extension to another extension, which are not sent over a trunk. External calls External calls are calls sent from one trunk to another trunk, which are not sent to any internal extension. Inbound Trunks Select certain inbound trunk(s) and the CDR of calls going inbound through the trunk(s) will be filtered out. Outbound Trunks Select certain outbound trunk(s) and the CDR of calls going outbound through the trunk(s) will be filtered out. Start Time Specify the start time to filter the CDR report. Click on the calendar icon on the right and the calendar will show for users to select the exact date and time. End Time Specify the end time to filter the CDR report. Click on the calendar icon on the right and the calendar will show for users to select the exact date and time. Caller Number Enter the caller number to filter the CDR report. CDR with the matching caller number will be filtered out. User could specify a particular caller number or enter a pattern. matches zero or more characters, only appears in the end. X matches any digit from 0 to 9, case-insensitive, repeatable, only appears in the end. For example:
3XXX: It will filter out CDR that having caller number with leading digit 3 and of 4 digits length. 3.: It will filter out CDR that having caller number with leading digit 3 and of any length. Caller Name Enter the caller name to filter the CDR report. CDR with the matching caller name will Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 296 of 321 be filtered out. Callee Number Enter the callee number to filter the CDR report. CDR with the matching callee number will be filtered out. The call report will display as the following figure shows. Figure 178: Call Report Users could perform the following operations on the call report. Sort Click on the header of the column to sort by this category. For example, clicking on "Start Time" will sort the report according to start time. Clicking on "Start Time" again will reverse the order. Download Searched Results Click on Download Search Result(s) to export the records filtered out to a .csv file. Download All Records Click on Download All Records to export all the records to a .csv file. Delete All On the bottom of the page, click on "Delete All" button to remove all the call report information. Play/Download/Delete Recording File (per entry) If the entry has audio recording file for the call, the three icons on the most right column will be activated for users to select. In the following picture, the second entry has audio recording file for the call. Click on to play the recording file; click on to download the recording file in .wav format; click on to delete the recording file (the call record entry will not be deleted). Figure 179: Call Report Entry with Audio Recording File Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 297 of 321 Automatic Download CDR Records User could configure the UCM6200 to automatically download the CDR records and send the records to an Email address. Click on Automatic Download Settings, and configure the parameters in the dialog below. Figure 180: Automatic Download Settings To receive CDR record automatically from Email, check Enable and select a time period By Day By Week or By Month for the automatic download period. Make sure you have entered an Email address to receive the CDR records. CDR IMPROVEMENT Starting from UCM6200 firmware 1.0.10.x, transferred call will no longer be displayed as a separate call entry in CDR. It will display within call record in the same entry. CDR new features can be found under web UI-> Status->CDR->CDR. The user can click on the option icon for a specific call log entry to view details about this entry, such as premier caller and transferred call information. Figure 181: CDR Report Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 298 of 321 Figure 182: Detailed CDR Information DOWNLOADED CDR FILE The downloaded CDR (.csv file) has different format from the web UI CDR. Here are some descriptions. Call From, Call To
"Call From": the caller ID.
"Call To": the callee ID. If "Call From" shows empty, "Call To" shows "s" (see highlight part in the picture below) and the "Source Channel" contains "DAHDI", this means the call is from FXO/PSTN line. For FXO/PSTN line, we only know there is an incoming request when there is incoming call but we don't know the number being called. So we are using "s" to match it where "s" means "start". Context Figure 183: Downloaded CDR File Sample - Call To Shows "s"
There are different context values that might show up in the downloaded CDR file. The actual value can vary case by case. Here are some sample values and their descriptions. from-internal: internal extension makes outbound calls. ext-did-XXXXX: inbound calls. It starts with "ext-did", and "XXXXX" content varies case by case, which also relate to the order when the trunk is created. ext-local: internal calls between local extensions. Source Channel, Dest Channel Sample 1:
Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 299 of 321 Figure 184: Downloaded CDR File Sample - Source Channel and Dest Channel 1 DAHDI means it is an analog call, FXO or FXS. For UCM6202, DAHDI/(1-2) are FXO ports, and DAHDI(3-4) are FXS ports. For UCM6204, DAHDI/(1-4) are FXO ports, and DAHDI(5-6) are FXS ports. For UCM6208, DAHDI/(1-8) are FXO ports, and DAHDI(9-10) are FXS ports. Sample 2:
Figure 185: Downloaded CDR File Sample - Source Channel and Dest Channel 2
"SIP" means it's a SIP call. There are three possible format:
(a) SIP/NUM-XXXXXX, where NUM is the local SIP extension number. The last XXXXX is a random string and can be ignored.
(c) SIP/trunk_X/NUM, where trunk_X is the internal trunk name, and NUM is the number to dial out through the trunk.
(c) SIP/trunk_X-XXXXXX, where trunk_X is the internal trunk name and it is an inbound call from this trunk. The last XXXXX is a random string and can be ignored. Sample 3:
Figure 186: Downloaded CDR File Sample - Source Channel and Dest Channel 3 This is a very special channel name. If it shows up, most likely it means a conference call. There are some other possible values, but these values are almost the application name which are used by the dialplan. IAX2/NUM-XXXXXXX: it means this is an IAX call. Local/@from-internal-XXXXX: it is used internally to do some special feature procedure. We can simply ignore it. Hangup: the call is hung up from the dialplan. This indicates there are some errors or it has run into abnormal cases. Playback: play some prompts to you, such as 183 response or run into an IVR. ReadExten: collect numbers from user. It may occur when you input PIN codes or run into DISA Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 300 of 321 STATISTICS CDR Statistics is an additional feature on the UCM6200 which provides users a visual overview of the call report across the time frame. Users can filter with different criteria to generate the statistics chart. Figure 187: CDR Statistics Table 100: CDR Statistics Filter Criteria Trunk Type Select one of the following trunk type. All SIP Calls PSTN Calls Call Type Select one or more in the following checkboxes. Inbound calls Outbound calls Internal calls External calls All calls Time Range By month (of the selected year). By week (of the selected year). By day (of the specified month for the year). By hour (of the specified date). By range. For example, 2016-01 To 2016-03. RECORDING FILES This page lists all the recording files recorded by "Auto Record" per extension/ring group/call queue/trunk, or via feature code "Audio Mix Record". If external storage device is plugged in, for example, SD card or USB drive, the files are stored on the external storage. Otherwise, internal storage will be used on the UCM6200. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 301 of 321 Figure 188: CDR->Recording Files Click on Delete Selected Recording Files to delete the recording files. Click on Delete All Recording Files to delete all recording files. Click on to download the recording file in .wav format. Click on to delete the recording file. To sort the recording file, click on the title "Caller", "Callee" or "Call Time" for the corresponding column. Click on the title again can switch the sorting mode between ascending order or descending order. API CONFIGURATION The UCM6200 supports third party billing interface API for external billing software to access CDR and call recordings on the PBX. The API uses HTTPS to request the CDR data and call recording data matching given parameters as configured on the third party application. Before accessing the API, the administrators need enable API and configure the access/authentication information on the UCM6200 first. The API configuration parameters are listed in the table below. Enable Enable/Disable API. The default setting is disabled. Table 101: API Configuration Files TLS Bind Address Configure the IP address for TLS server to bind to. "0.0.0.0" means binding to all interfaces. The port number is optional and the default port number is 8443. The IP address must match the common name (host name) in the certificate so that the TLS socket won't bind to multiple IP addresses. The default setting is 0.0.0.0:8443. TLS Private Key Upload TLS private key. The size of the key file must be under 2MB. This file will be renamed as 'private.pem' automatically. TLS Cert Upload TLS cert. The size of the certificate must be under 2MB. This is the certificate file (*.pem format only) for TLS connection. This file will be renamed as
"certificate.pem" automatically. It contains private key for the client and signed certificate for the server. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 302 of 321 Username Configure the Username for API Authentication. Password Permitted Configure the Password for API Authentication. Specify a list of IP addresses permitted by API. This creates an AIP-specific access control list. Multiple entries are allowed. For example, "192.168.40.3/255.255.255.255" denies access from all IP addresses except 192.168.40.3. The default setting is blank, meaning all IPs will be denied. Users must set permitted IP address before connecting to the API. For more details on CDR API (Access to Call Detail Records) and REC API (Access to Call Recording Files), please refer the document in the link here:
http://www.grandstream.com/sites/default/files/Resources/ucm6200_cdr_rec_api_guide.pdf Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 303 of 321 Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 304 of 321 UPGRADING AND MAINTENANCE UPGRADING The UCM6200 can be upgraded to a new firmware version remotely or locally. This section describes how to upgrade your UCM6200 via network or local upload. UPGRADING VIA NETWORK The UCM6200 can be upgraded via TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS by configuring the URL/IP Address for the TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS server and selecting a download method. Configure a valid URL for TFTP, HTTP or HTTPS; the server name can be FQDN or IP address. Examples of valid URLs:
firmware.grandstream.com/BETA The upgrading configuration can be accessed via Web GUI->Maintenance->Upgrade. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 Figure 189: Network Upgrade UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 305 of 321 Upgrade Via Allow users to choose the firmware upgrade method: TFTP, HTTP or Table 102: Network Upgrade Configuration HTTPS. Firmware Server Path Define the server path for the firmware server. Firmware File Prefix If configured, only the firmware with the matching encrypted prefix will be downloaded and flashed into the UCM6200. Firmware File Suffix If configured, only the firmware with the matching encrypted postfix will be downloaded and flashed into the UCM6200. HTTP/HTTPS User Name The user name for the HTTP/HTTPS server. HTTP/HTTPS Password The password for the HTTP/HTTPS server. Please follow the steps below to upgrade the firmware remotely. Enter the firmware server path under web UI->Maintenance->Upgrade. Click on "Save". Then reboot the device to start the upgrading process. Please be patient during the upgrading process. Once done, a reboot message will be displayed in the LCD. Manually reboot the UCM6200 when it's appropriate to avoid immediate service interruption. After it boots up, log in the web GUI to check the firmware version. UPGRADING VIA LOCAL UPLOAD If there is no HTTP/TFTP server, users could also upload the firmware to the UCM6200 directly via Web GUI. Please follow the steps below to upload firmware locally. Download the latest UCM6200 firmware file from the following link and save it in your PC. http://www.grandstream.com/support/firmware Log in the Web GUI as administrator in the PC. Go to Web GUI->Maintenance->Upgrade, upload the firmware file by clicking on and select the firmware file from your PC. The default firmware file name is ucm6200fw.bin Figure 190: Local Upgrade Click on to start upgrading. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 306 of 321 Figure 191: Upgrading Firmware Files Wait until the upgrading process is successful and a window will be popped up in the Web GUI. Figure 192: Reboot UCM6200 Click on "OK" to reboot the UCM6200 and check the firmware version after it boots up.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Note:
Please do not interrupt or power cycle the UCM6200 during upgrading process.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 307 of 321 NO LOCAL FIRMWARE SERVERS Service providers should maintain their own firmware upgrade servers. For users who do not have TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS server, some free windows version TFTP servers are available for download from http://www.solarwinds.com/products/freetools/free_tftp_server.aspx http://tftpd32.jounin.net Please check our website at http://www.grandstream.com/support/firmware for latest firmware. Instructions for local firmware upgrade via TFTP:
1. Unzip the firmware files and put all of them in the root directory of the TFTP server;
2. Connect the PC running the TFTP server and the UCM6200 to the same LAN segment;
3. Launch the TFTP server and go to the File menu->Configure->Security to change the TFTP server's default setting from "Receive Only" to "Transmit Only" for the firmware upgrade;
4. Start the TFTP server and configure the TFTP server in the UCM6200 web configuration interface;
5. Configure the Firmware Server Path to the IP address of the PC;
6. Update the changes and reboot the UCM6200. End users can also choose to download a free HTTP server from http://httpd.apache.org/ or use Microsoft IIS web server. BACKUP The UCM6200 configuration can be backed up locally or via network. The backup file will be used to restore the configuration on UCM6200 when necessary. BACKUP/RESTORE Users could backup the UCM6200 configurations for restore purpose under Web GUI->Maintenance->Backup->Local Backup. Click on to create a new backup file. Then the following dialog will show. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 308 of 321 Figure 193: Create New Backup 1. Choose the type(s) of files to be included in the backup. 2. Choose where to store the backup file: USB Disk, SD Card or Local. 3. Name the backup file. 4. Click on "Backup" to start backup. Once the backup is done, the list of the backups will be displayed with date and time in the web page. Users can download
, restore
, or delete it from the UCM6200 internal storage or the external device. Click on backup file will also be displayed in the web page and can be used to restore the UCM6200. to upload backup file from the local device to UCM6200. The uploaded Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 309 of 321 Figure 194: Backup / Restore option allows UCM to perform automatically backup on the user specified time. Regular backup file can only be stored in USB / SD card / SFTP server. User is allowed to set backup time from 0-23 and how frequent the backup will be performed. Figure 195: Local Backup Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 310 of 321 DATA SYNC Besides local backup, users could backup the voice records/voice mails/CDR/FAX in a daily basis to a remote server via SFTP protocol automatically under Web GUI->Maintenance->Backup->Data Sync. Figure 196: Data Sync Table 103: Data Sync Configuration Enable Data Sync Enable the auto data sync function. The default setting is "No". Account Password Enter the Account name on the SFTP backup server. Enter the Password associate with the Account on the SFTP backup server. Server Address Enter the SFTP server address. Sync Time Enter 0-23 to specify the backup hour of the day. Before saving the configuration, users could click on "Test Connection". The UCM6200 will then try connecting the server to make sure the server is up and accessible for the UCM6200. Save the changes and all the backup logs will be listed on the web page. After data sync is configured, users could also Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 311 of 321 manually synchronize all data by clicking on instead of waiting for the backup time interval to come. RESTORE CONFIGURATION FROM BACKUP FILE To restore the configuration on the UCM6200 from a backup file, users could go to Web GUI->Maintenance->Backup->Local Backup. A list of previous configuration backups is displayed on the web page. Users could click on of the desired backup file and it will be restored to the UCM6200. If users have other backup files on PC to restore on the UCM6200, click on "Upload Backup File" first and select it from local PC to upload on the UCM6200. Once the uploading is done, this backup file will be displayed in the list of previous configuration backups for restore purpose. Click on to restore from the backup file. Figure 197: Restore UCM6200 from Backup File
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Note:
The uploaded backup file must be a tar file with no special characters like *,!,#,@,&,$,%,^,(,),/,\,space in the file name. The uploaded back file size must be under 10MB.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ --------------------------------------------------
Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 312 of 321 CLEANER Users could configure to clean the Call Detail Report/Voice Records/Voice Mails/FAX automatically under Web GUI->Maintenance->Cleaner. Figure 198: Cleaner Table 104: Cleaner Configuration Enable CDR Cleaner Enable the CDR Cleaner function. CDR Clean Time Enter 0-23 to specify the hour of the day to clean up CDR. Clean Interval Enter 1-30 to specify the day of the month to clean up CDR. Enable VR Cleaner Enter the Voice Records Cleaner function. Choose Cleaner File Select the files for system automatic clean. Recording Files Conference Queue Voicemail Fax VR Clean Threshold Specify the Voice Records threshold from 0 to 99 by using local storage status in percentage. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 313 of 321 VR Clean Time Clean Interval Enter 0-23 to specify the hour of the day to clean up Voice Records. Enter 1-30 to specify the day of the month to clean up Voice Records. All the cleaner logs will be listed on the bottom of the page.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Note:
Cleaner will delete data based on Recording Storage selection. If USB Disk is selected, Cleaner will only clean data in USB and local data will leave untouched. If Enable auto change is selected and USB disk is connected, Cleaner will only delete data in USB drive. Recordings Storage function can be found under web UI-> Settings-> Recordings Storage-> Recordings Storage.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
RESET AND REBOOT Users could perform reset and reboot under Web GUI->Maintenance->Reset and Reboot. To factory reset the device, select the mode type first. There are two different types for reset. User Data: All the data including voicemail, recordings, IVR Prompt, Music on Hold, CDR and backup files will be cleared. All: All the configurations and data will be reset to factory default. Figure 199: Reset and Reboot Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 314 of 321 SYSLOG On the UCM6200, users could dump the syslog information to a remote server under Web GUI->Maintenance->Syslog. Enter the syslog server hostname or IP address and select the module/level for the syslog information. The default syslog level for all modules is "error", which is recommended in your UCM6200 settings because it can be helpful to locate the issues when errors happen. Some typical modules for UCM6200 functions are as follows and users can turn on "notic" and "verb"
levels besides "error" level. pbx: This module is related to general PBX functions. chan_sip: This module is related to SIP calls. chan_dahdi: This module is related to analog calls (FXO/FXS). app_meetme: This module is related to conference bridge.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Note:
Syslog is usually for debugging and troubleshooting purpose. Turning on all levels for all syslog modules is not recommended for daily usage. Too many syslog print might cause traffic and affect system performance.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TROUBLESHOOTING On the UCM6200, users could capture traces, ping remote host and traceroute remote host for troubleshooting purpose under Web GUI->Maintenance->Troubleshooting. ETHERNET CAPTURE The captured trace can be downloaded for analysis. Also the instructions or result will be displayed in the web GUI output result. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 315 of 321 Figure 200: Ethernet Capture The output result is in .pcap format. Therefore, users could specify the capture filter as used in general network traffic capture tool (host, src, dst, net, protocol, port, port range) before starting capturing the trace. IP PING Enter the target host in host name or IP address. Then press "Start" button. The output result will dynamically display in the window below. Figure 201: PING Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 316 of 321 TRACEROUTE Enter the target host in host name or IP address. Then press "Start" button. The output result will dynamically display in the window below. Figure 202: Traceroute ANALOG RECORD TRACE Analog record trace can be used to troubleshoot analog trunk issue, for example, the UCM6200 user has caller ID issue for incoming call from Analog trunk. Users can access analog record trance under web GUI->Maintenance->Troubleshooting ->Analog Record Trace. Here is the step to capture trace:
1. Select FXO or FXS for "Record Ports". If the issue happens on FXO 1, select FXO port 1 to record the trace. 2. Select "Record Direction". 3. Select "Record File Mode" to separate the record per direction or mix. 4. Click on "Start". 5. Make a call via the analog port that has the issue. 6. Once done, click on "Stop". 7. Click on "Download" to download the analog record trace. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 317 of 321 Figure 203: Troubleshooting Analog Trunks After capturing the trace, users can download it for basic analysis. Or you can contact Grandstream Technical support in the following link for further assistance if the issue is not resolved. http://www.grandstream.com/index.php/support SERVICE CHECK Enable Service Check to periodically check UCM6200. Check Cycle is configurable in seconds and the default setting is 60 sec. Check Times is the maximum number of failed checks before restart the UCM6200. The default setting is 3. If there is no response from UCM6200 after 3 attempts (default) to check, current status will be stored and the internal service in UCM6200 will be restarted. Figure 204: Service Check NETWORK STATUS In UCM6200 web UI->Maintenance->Troubleshooting->Network Status, the users can view active Internet connections. This information can be used to troubleshoot connection issue between UCM6200 and other services. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 318 of 321 Figure 205: Network Status REMOTE ACCESS SSH ACCESS SSH switch now is available via web UI and LCD. User can enable or disable SSH access directly from web UI or LCD screen. For web SSH access, please log in UCM6200 web interface and go to Maintenance->Remote Access->SSH Access. By default, SSH access is disabled for security concerns. It is highly recommended to only enable SSH access for debugging purpose. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 319 of 321 Figure 206: SSH Access Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 320 of 321 EXPERIENCING THE UCM6200 SERIES IP PBX Please visit our website: http://www.grandstream.com to receive the most up- to-date updates on firmware releases, additional features, FAQs, documentation and news on new products. We encourage you to browse our product related documentation, FAQs and User and Developer Forum for answers to your general questions. If you have purchased our products through a Grandstream Certified Partner or Reseller, please contact them directly for immediate support. Our technical support staff is trained and ready to answer all of your questions. Contact a technical support member or submit a trouble ticket online to receive in-depth support. Thank you again for purchasing Grandstream UCM6200 series IP PBX appliance, it will be sure to bring convenience and color to both your business and personal life.
* Asterisk is a Registered Trademark of Digium, Inc. Firmware Version 1.0.0.1 UCM6200 Series IP PBX User Manual Page 321 of 321 FCC Caution:
This device complies with part15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Regulatory Information U.S. FCC Part 68 Statement This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. The unit bears a label on the back which contains among other information a product identifier in the format US: GNIIS00BUCM6202. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company. This equipment uses the following standard jack types for network connection: RJ11C. This equipment contains an FCC compliant modular jack. It is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using compatible modular plugs and cabling which comply with the requirements of FCC Part 68 rules. The Ringer Equivalence Number, or REN, is used to determine the number of devices which may be connected to the telephone line. An excessive REN may cause the equipment to not ring in response to an incoming call. In most areas, the sum of the RENs of all equipment on a line should not exceed five
(5.0). In the unlikely event that this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company can temporarily disconnect your service. The telephone company will try to warn you in advance of any such disconnection, but if advance notice isn't practical, it may disconnect the service first and notify you as soon as possible afterwards. In the event such a disconnection is deemed necessary, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC. From time to time, the telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, or operations which could affect the operation of this equipment. If this occurs, the telephone company is required to provide you with advance notice so you can make the modifications necessary to obtain uninterrupted service. There are no user serviceable components within this equipment. See Warranty flyer for repair or warranty information. It shall be unlawful for any person within the United States to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile unless such message clearly contains, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or of such business, other entity, or individual. The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges. Telephone facsimile machines manufactured on and after December 20, 1992, must clearly mark such identifying information on each transmitted message. Facsimile modem boards manufactured on and after December 13, 1995, must comply with the requirements of this section. This equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided by the telephone company. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs. Contact your state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for more information.
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC